diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
index 393f9128a..a1e0888a3 100644
--- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Luke
1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1–4)
2. Prologue
* The birth of John the Baptist (1:5–80)
* The birth and youth of Jesus (2:1–51)
* The ministry of John the Baptist (3:1–20)
* The baptism, genealogy, and temptation of Jesus (3:21–4:13)
3. The teaching and healing ministry of Jesus in Galilee (4:14–9:50)
4. Jesus teaches along his journey to Jerusalem
* Judgment by God, and people’s judgments about Jesus (9:51–13:21)
* Who will be part of the kingdom of God (13:22–17:10)
* Responding to Jesus by welcoming or rejecting him (17:11–19:27)
5. Jesus in Jerusalem
* Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem (19:28–44)
* Jesus teaches in the temple: conflict over his identity and authority (19:45–21:38)
* Jesus’ death, burial, and resurrection (22:1–24:53)
### What is the Gospel of Luke about?
The Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his gospel for a person named Theophilus and dedicated it to him. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life and teachings of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain that what he had been taught about Jesus was true. However, Luke expected that what he wrote would encourage all followers of Jesus.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Luke” or “The Gospel according to Luke.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Good News about Jesus that Luke Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Book of Luke?
This book does not give the name of its author. However, the same person who wrote this book also wrote the Book of Acts, which is also dedicated to Theophilus. In parts of the book of Acts, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have recognized Luke as the author of both the Gospel of Luke and the book of Acts.
Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he tells Theophilus in his dedication that he talked to many people who did.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### The kingdom of God
“The kingdom of God” is a major concept in the Gospel of Luke. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?
Luke wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?
Luke described women in a very positive way in his gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the Synoptic Gospels?
The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they tell the story of many of the same events. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”
Passages are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.
### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?
In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to Daniel [7:13–14](../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.
Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])
Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.
### Major issues in the text of the Book of Luke
ULT follows the readings of the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. However, there may already be older versions of the Bible in the translators’ regions that follow the readings of other manuscripts. In the most significant cases, the General Notes to the chapters in which these differences occur will discuss them and recommend approaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1–4)
2. The angel Gabriel announces to Zechariah that his wife Elizabeth is going to bear a son, John the Baptist (1:5–25)
3. The angel Gabriel announces to Mary that she is going to become the mother of Jesus (1:26–38)
4. Mary goes to visit Elizabeth (1:39–56)
5. John the Baptist is born (1:57–80)
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in Mary’s song about becoming the mother of Jesus in 1:46–55 and Zechariah’s song about the birth of his son John the Baptist in 1:68–79.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “He will be called John”
Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name.
+LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Luke
1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1-4)
2. Prologue
* The birth of John the Baptist (1:5-80)
* The birth and youth of Jesus (2:1-51)
* The ministry of John the Baptist (3:1-20)
* The baptism, genealogy, and temptation of Jesus (3:21-4:13)
3. The teaching and healing ministry of Jesus in Galilee (4:14-9:50)
4. Jesus teaches along his journey to Jerusalem
* Judgment by God, and people’s judgments about Jesus (9:51-13:21)
* Who will be part of the kingdom of God (13:22-17:10)
* Responding to Jesus by welcoming or rejecting him (17:11-19:27)
5. Jesus in Jerusalem
* Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem (19:28-44)
* Jesus teaches in the temple: conflict over his identity and authority (19:45-21:38)
* Jesus’ death, burial, and resurrection (22:1-24:53)
### What is the Gospel of Luke about?
The Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his gospel for a person named Theophilus and dedicated it to him. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life and teachings of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain that what he had been taught about Jesus was true. However, Luke expected that what he wrote would encourage all followers of Jesus.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Luke” or “The Gospel according to Luke.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Good News about Jesus that Luke Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Book of Luke?
This book does not give the name of its author. However, the same person who wrote this book also wrote the Book of Acts, which is also dedicated to Theophilus. In parts of the book of Acts, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have recognized Luke as the author of both the Gospel of Luke and the book of Acts.
Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he tells Theophilus in his dedication that he talked to many people who did.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### The kingdom of God
“The kingdom of God” is a major concept in the Gospel of Luke. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?
Luke wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?
Luke described women in a very positive way in his gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the Synoptic Gospels?
The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they tell the story of many of the same events. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”
Passages are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.
### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?
In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to Daniel [7:13-14](../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.
Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])
Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.
### Major issues in the text of the Book of Luke
ULT follows the readings of the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. However, there may already be older versions of the Bible in the translators’ regions that follow the readings of other manuscripts. In the most significant cases, the General Notes to the chapters in which these differences occur will discuss them and recommend approaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1-4)
2. The angel Gabriel announces to Zechariah that his wife Elizabeth is going to bear a son, John the Baptist (1:5-25)
3. The angel Gabriel announces to Mary that she is going to become the mother of Jesus (1:26-38)
4. Mary goes to visit Elizabeth (1:39-56)
5. John the Baptist is born (1:57-80)
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in Mary’s song about becoming the mother of Jesus in 1:46-55 and Zechariah’s song about the birth of his son John the Baptist in 1:68-79.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “He will be called John”
Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name.
LUK 1 1 qhd9 figs-activepassive περὶ τῶν πεπληροφορημένων ἐν ἡμῖν πραγμάτων 1 concerning the things that have been fulfilled among us If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “about those things that have happened among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
LUK 1 1 hyp6 figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 among us Luke dedicates this book to a man named Theophilus. It is no longer known exactly who he was. But since Luke says in [1:4](../01/04.md) that he wants Theophilus to know that the things he has been taught are reliable, it appears that he was a follower of Jesus. So here the word **us** would include him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
LUK 1 2 hud2 figs-metonymy οἱ…αὐτόπται…γενόμενοι 1 who … were eyewitnesses The term **eyewitness** describes someone who saw something happen personally, “with their own eyes.” The term describes such a person figuratively by reference to something associated with sight, the eye. Alternate translation: “who … saw these things personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ LUK 1 80 eh9j figs-explicit ἦν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις 1 he was in th
LUK 1 80 qu12 ἕως ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 until the day of his public appearance The term **until** does not indicate a stopping point. John continued to live out in the wilderness even after he started preaching publicly. In your translation, be sure that this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “through the time when he began to preach in public”
LUK 1 80 ie4l figs-idiom ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 the day of his public appearance Here, Luke uses the term **day** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “the time when he began to preach in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
LUK 1 80 l102 figs-personification πρὸς τὸν Ἰσραήλ 1 to Israel Luke is referring to all of the Israelites figuratively as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-LUK 2 intro dw6t 0 # Luke 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus is born in the city of Bethlehem (2:1–20)
2. Joseph and Mary dedicate Jesus, and Simeon and Anna speak about him (2:21–40)
3. Jesus goes to Jerusalem with his parents for Passover (2:41–52)
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in the song of the angels about Jesus’ birth in 2:14 and in Simeon’s song about Jesus in 2:29–32.
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “his father and mother”
In [2:33](../02/33.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “his father and mother.” ULT follows that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts read “Joseph and his mother.” That reading indicates that Joseph was not the biological father of Jesus, since Mary conceived him as a virgin. However, Joseph was the adoptive father of Jesus, and so the reading “his father and mother” is not incorrect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+LUK 2 intro dw6t 0 # Luke 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus is born in the city of Bethlehem (2:1-20)
2. Joseph and Mary dedicate Jesus, and Simeon and Anna speak about him (2:21-40)
3. Jesus goes to Jerusalem with his parents for Passover (2:41-52)
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in the song of the angels about Jesus’ birth in 2:14 and in Simeon’s song about Jesus in 2:29-32.
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “his father and mother”
In [2:33](../02/33.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “his father and mother.” ULT follows that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts read “Joseph and his mother.” That reading indicates that Joseph was not the biological father of Jesus, since Mary conceived him as a virgin. However, Joseph was the adoptive father of Jesus, and so the reading “his father and mother” is not incorrect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
LUK 2 1 c887 writing-newevent ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days This time reference introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 2 1 l103 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days Here, Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
LUK 2 1 e9m5 writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 it happened that Luke uses this phrase to show that this is the beginning of an account. If your language has a way of showing the start of an account, you may use that in your translation. If not, you may choose not to represent this phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
@@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ LUK 2 27 k53l figs-idiom ἦλθεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 he came in t
LUK 2 27 uqr6 figs-go ἦλθεν…εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 he came … into the temple Your language may say “went” in contexts such as this. Alternate translation: “he went … into the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
LUK 2 27 y8la figs-synecdoche εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 into the temple Since only priests could enter the **temple** building, this means the **temple** courtyard. Luke is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
LUK 2 27 wt3r writing-participants τοὺς γονεῖς 1 the parents This means the parents of Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use their names here. Alternate translation: “Mary and Joseph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-LUK 2 27 h444 figs-explicit τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτοὺς κατὰ τὸ εἰθισμένον τοῦ νόμου περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 for them to do according to the custom of the law concerning him The phrase **to do according to the custom of the law** refers to the ceremony of dedication that Luke described in [2:22–25](../02/22.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to perform the ceremony of dedication that the law of God required” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK 2 27 h444 figs-explicit τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτοὺς κατὰ τὸ εἰθισμένον τοῦ νόμου περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 for them to do according to the custom of the law concerning him The phrase **to do according to the custom of the law** refers to the ceremony of dedication that Luke described in [2:22-25](../02/22.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to perform the ceremony of dedication that the law of God required” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 2 28 l139 grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 and Luke uses this word to indicate that this event took place after the event he has just described. That is, Simeon took Jesus in his arms after his parents brought him into the temple for the dedication ceremony. Alternate translation: “then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
LUK 2 28 y5g6 writing-pronouns αὐτὸς ἐδέξατο αὐτὸ εἰς τὰς ἀγκάλας 1 he took him into his arms If it would be clearer in your language, you could specify by name the people to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “Simeon picked up the baby Jesus and held him in his arms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
LUK 2 29 l140 figs-declarative νῦν ἀπολύεις τὸν δοῦλόν σου…ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 You are now dismissing your servant in peace Simeon is actually using this statement to make a request. Alternate translation: “Now please let me die in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
@@ -479,7 +479,7 @@ LUK 2 51 zl2q figs-activepassive ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος αὐτοῖ
LUK 2 51 ceu3 figs-metaphor διετήρει πάντα τὰ ῥήματα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς 1 kept all these things in her heart As in [2:19](../02/19.md), the **heart** here figuratively represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “carefully remembered all these things” or “reflected carefully on what all these things meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
LUK 2 52 gb25 figs-abstractnouns Ἰησοῦς προέκοπτεν τῇ σοφίᾳ, καὶ ἡλικίᾳ 1 Jesus was increasing in wisdom and stature If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the ideas behind the abstract nouns **wisdom** and **stature** with adjectives. These two terms refer to mental and physical growth. Alternate translation: “Jesus steadily became wiser and stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
LUK 2 52 y5qk figs-abstractnouns χάριτι παρὰ Θεῷ καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 in favor with God and people If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **favor** with verbs. The phrase **in favor with God and people** refers to spiritual and social growth. Alternate translation: “God blessed him more and more, and people admired him more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-LUK 3 intro tkg5 0 # Luke 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. John the Baptist begins preaching and baptizing (3:1–22)
2. The list of Jesus’ ancestors (3:23–38)
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 3:4–6, which Luke is quoting from the Old Testament about John the Baptist.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Justice
John’s instructions to the soldiers and tax collectors in Luke 3:12–15 are things that a person who wanted to live rightly would find reasonable and willingly do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and Luke [3:12-15](./12.md))
### Genealogy
A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Such lists were very important in determining who had the right be king, because the king’s authority was usually passed down or inherited from his father. It was also common for other important people to have a recorded genealogy.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Prophecy often involves the use of metaphors to express its meaning. Spiritual discernment is needed for proper interpretation of the prophecy. The prophecy that Luke quotes in 3:4–6 from Isaiah 40:3–5 is an extended metaphor that describes the ministry of John the Baptist. See the individual notes to 3:4–6 for recommendations about how to translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Herod locked up John in prison”
This statement could cause confusion because Luke says that John was imprisoned, and then he implies that John was still able to baptize Jesus. But Luke makes this statement in anticipation of Herod’s imprisonment of John. It describes something that was still in the future at the time of the other events in the narrative. See the first note to 3:19 for a further explanation.
+LUK 3 intro tkg5 0 # Luke 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. John the Baptist begins preaching and baptizing (3:1-22)
2. The list of Jesus’ ancestors (3:23-38)
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 3:4-6, which Luke is quoting from the Old Testament about John the Baptist.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Justice
John’s instructions to the soldiers and tax collectors in Luke 3:12-15 are things that a person who wanted to live rightly would find reasonable and willingly do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and Luke [3:12-15](./12.md))
### Genealogy
A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Such lists were very important in determining who had the right be king, because the king’s authority was usually passed down or inherited from his father. It was also common for other important people to have a recorded genealogy.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphor
Prophecy often involves the use of metaphors to express its meaning. Spiritual discernment is needed for proper interpretation of the prophecy. The prophecy that Luke quotes in 3:4-6 from Isaiah 40:3-5 is an extended metaphor that describes the ministry of John the Baptist. See the individual notes to 3:4-6 for recommendations about how to translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Herod locked up John in prison”
This statement could cause confusion because Luke says that John was imprisoned, and then he implies that John was still able to baptize Jesus. But Luke makes this statement in anticipation of Herod’s imprisonment of John. It describes something that was still in the future at the time of the other events in the narrative. See the first note to 3:19 for a further explanation.
LUK 3 1 l167 writing-newevent ἐν ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτῳ τῆς ἡγεμονίας Τιβερίου Καίσαρος 1 in the fifteenth year of the reign of Tiberius Caesar This verse and the beginning of the next one are an extended time reference that introduces a new event. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Everything that the angels and inspired people had said about John and Jesus began to come true during the fifteenth year of the reign of Tiberius Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 3 1 l168 translate-ordinal ἐν ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτῳ 1 in the fifteenth year If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “in year 15” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
LUK 3 1 l169 writing-participants Τιβερίου Καίσαρος 1 Tiberius Caesar As in [2:1](../02/01.md), **Caesar** is the title of the emperor of the Roman Empire. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “King Tiberius, who ruled the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
@@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ LUK 3 36 xit8 translate-names τοῦ Καϊνὰμ, τοῦ Ἀρφαξὰδ,
LUK 3 37 qev8 translate-names τοῦ Μαθουσαλὰ, τοῦ Ἑνὼχ, τοῦ Ἰάρετ, τοῦ Μαλελεὴλ, τοῦ Καϊνὰμ 1 of Methuselah, of Enoch, of Jared, of Mahalaleel, of Cainan This is a continuation of the list of Jesus’ ancestors that began in Luke 3:23. Use the same format as you used in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
LUK 3 38 ni8x translate-names τοῦ Ἐνὼς, τοῦ Σὴθ, τοῦ Ἀδὰμ, τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of Enos, of Seth, of Adam, of God This is a continuation of the list of Jesus’ ancestors that began in Luke 3:23. Use the same format as you used in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
LUK 3 38 ck3f τοῦ Ἀδὰμ, τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of Adam, of God Alternate translation: “the son of Adam, whom God created” or “the son of Adam, who was, in a sense, the son of God”
-LUK 4 intro r3vy 0 # Luke 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. The devil tempts Jesus in the wilderness (4:1–13)
2. Jesus teaches in the synagogue in Nazareth (4:14–30)
3. Jesus teaches, heals, and drives out demons in Capernaum (4:31–44)
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 4:10-11 and 4:18-19, which is quoted from the Old Testamentt.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Jesus was tempted by the devil”
While it is true that the devil actually believed that he could persuade Jesus to disobey God and obey him instead, it is important not to imply in your translation that Jesus would ever really have wanted to obey the devil.
+LUK 4 intro r3vy 0 # Luke 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. The devil tempts Jesus in the wilderness (4:1-13)
2. Jesus teaches in the synagogue in Nazareth (4:14-30)
3. Jesus teaches, heals, and drives out demons in Capernaum (4:31-44)
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 4:10-11 and 4:18-19, which is quoted from the Old Testamentt.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Jesus was tempted by the devil”
While it is true that the devil actually believed that he could persuade Jesus to disobey God and obey him instead, it is important not to imply in your translation that Jesus would ever really have wanted to obey the devil.
LUK 4 1 n1xx writing-newevent Ἰησοῦς δὲ 1 Then Jesus Luke uses this expression to return to the story after providing background information about Jesus’ ancestors. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include a phrase that would provide continuity with the previous episode in the story. Alternate translation: “After John had baptized Jesus, then Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 4 1 l201 translate-names τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 the Jordan **Jordan** is the name of a river. Alternate translation: “the Jordan River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
LUK 4 1 v18k figs-activepassive ἤγετο ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 was led by the Spirit This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Spirit led him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -734,7 +734,7 @@ LUK 4 43 l244 figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελίσασθαί…τὴν Βασ
LUK 4 43 sjy1 figs-metonymy ταῖς ἑτέραις πόλεσιν 1 to other cities Jesus actually means the people who live in these cities. He is describing them figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the cities where they live. Alternate translation: “to the people in many other cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
LUK 4 43 b45z figs-activepassive ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἀπεστάλην 1 for this I was sent If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is the reason why God sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
LUK 4 44 s5mb figs-explicit τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 in Judea Since Jesus is in Galilee in this part of the Gospel of Luke, the term **Judea** here probably refers to the entire region where the Jews lived at that time. Alternate translation: “where the Jews lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK 5 intro axr7 0 # Luke 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus calls Peter and his fellow fishermen to be his disciples (5:1–11)
2. Jesus travels to various towns teaching and healing (5:12–26)
3. Jesus calls Levi to be his disciple (5:27–32)
4. Jesus teaches about fasting (5:33–39)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “You will catch men”
Peter, James, and John were fishermen. When Jesus told them that they would catch men, he was using a metaphor to tell them he wanted them to help people believe the good news about him. See the last note to 5:10. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### Sinners
When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses. But when Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who understand that they are sinners who have disobeyed God can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### Fasting and feasting
People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or in order to show God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, such as during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Healthy and sick people
To correct the Pharisees, Jesus speaks of healthy people who do not need a doctor. This does not mean that there are people who do not need Jesus. Rather, Jesus was explaining why he spent time with people whom the Pharisees considered to be “sinners.” See the notes to 5:31–32. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Implicit information
In several parts of this chapter, as in other places in the book, Luke does not explain information that his original readers would already have understood. Modern readers might not know some of those things, so they might have trouble understanding all that Luke is communicating. The alternate translations in these notes and the readings in UST often illustrate how that information can be presented so that modern readers will be able to understand these passages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Past events
Parts of this chapter are sequences of events that have already happened. In a given passage, Luke sometimes writes as if the events have already happened while other events are still in progress (even though they are complete at the time he writes). This can cause difficulty in translation by creating an illogical order of events. It may be necessary to make these consistent by writing as if all the events have already happened.
+LUK 5 intro axr7 0 # Luke 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus calls Peter and his fellow fishermen to be his disciples (5:1-11)
2. Jesus travels to various towns teaching and healing (5:12-26)
3. Jesus calls Levi to be his disciple (5:27-32)
4. Jesus teaches about fasting (5:33-39)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “You will catch men”
Peter, James, and John were fishermen. When Jesus told them that they would catch men, he was using a metaphor to tell them he wanted them to help people believe the good news about him. See the last note to 5:10. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### Sinners
When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses. But when Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who understand that they are sinners who have disobeyed God can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### Fasting and feasting
People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or in order to show God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, such as during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Healthy and sick people
To correct the Pharisees, Jesus speaks of healthy people who do not need a doctor. This does not mean that there are people who do not need Jesus. Rather, Jesus was explaining why he spent time with people whom the Pharisees considered to be “sinners.” See the notes to 5:31-32. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Implicit information
In several parts of this chapter, as in other places in the book, Luke does not explain information that his original readers would already have understood. Modern readers might not know some of those things, so they might have trouble understanding all that Luke is communicating. The alternate translations in these notes and the readings in UST often illustrate how that information can be presented so that modern readers will be able to understand these passages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Past events
Parts of this chapter are sequences of events that have already happened. In a given passage, Luke sometimes writes as if the events have already happened while other events are still in progress (even though they are complete at the time he writes). This can cause difficulty in translation by creating an illogical order of events. It may be necessary to make these consistent by writing as if all the events have already happened.
LUK 5 1 zc8q writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 5 1 wsf8 figs-metonymy ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here, Luke uses **word** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “listening to the the message Jesus was bringing from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
LUK 5 1 p6im translate-names τὴν λίμνην Γεννησαρέτ 1 the lake of Gennesaret **Lake of Gennesaret** is another name for the body of water also known as the Sea of Galilee. Galilee was on the west side of this lake, and the land of Gennesaret was on the east side, so it was called by both names. Some English versions translate this as the proper name of the body of water. Alternate translation: “Lake Gennesaret” or “the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ LUK 5 37 l279 figs-activepassive οἱ ἀσκοὶ ἀπολοῦνται 1 the
LUK 5 38 ijm3 ἀσκοὺς καινοὺς 1 new wineskins See how you translated the term **wineskins** in [5:37](../05/37.md). Alternate translation: “fresh leather bags”
LUK 5 39 l280 figs-ellipsis οὐδεὶς πιὼν παλαιὸν θέλει νέον 1 No one, after drinking the old, wants the new Jesus is leaving out some of the words. You can supply them in your translation if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “No one who is used to drinking old wine wants to try new wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
LUK 5 39 pvn9 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς πιὼν παλαιὸν θέλει νέον 1 No one, after drinking the old, wants the new Jesus is figuratively contrasting the old teaching of the religious leaders with his own new teaching. The point is that people who are used to the old teaching are not receptive to the new things that he is bringing. Jesus does not explain the metaphor, so you do not need to explain it in your translation unless you think your readers will not understand it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK 6 intro vv2y 0 # Luke 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches about the Sabbath (6:1–11)
2. Jesus chooses twelve apostles (6:12–16)
3. Jesus teaches about being his disciple (6:17–49)
The long teaching in Luke 6:20-49 begins with blessings and woes that are similar to the beginning of the long teaching in Matthew 5-7. That part of Matthew has traditionally been called the “Sermon on the Mount.” The teaching here in Luke has many other similarities with the one in Matthew’s gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Eating the grain”
When the disciples plucked and ate the grain in a field they were walking through on the Sabbath (Luke 6:1), the Pharisees said that they were breaking the law of Moses. The Pharisees said this because they thought that the disciples were doing work by picking the grain, and so they were disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees did not think the disciples were stealing. That is because the law of Moses told farmers to allow travelers to pluck and eat small amounts of grain from plants in fields that they traveled through or near. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### The twelve disciples
The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:
In Matthew:
Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.
In Mark:
Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.
In Luke:
Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.
The man whom Luke calls Judas the son of James is probably the same man whom Matthew and Mark call Thaddaeus. However, you do not need to explain that in your translation or give both names. You can translate Luke’s list as he wrote it, and allow Bible teachers to explain the reason for the difference.
+LUK 6 intro vv2y 0 # Luke 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches about the Sabbath (6:1-11)
2. Jesus chooses twelve apostles (6:12-16)
3. Jesus teaches about being his disciple (6:17-49)
The long teaching in Luke 6:20-49 begins with blessings and woes that are similar to the beginning of the long teaching in Matthew 5-7. That part of Matthew has traditionally been called the “Sermon on the Mount.” The teaching here in Luke has many other similarities with the one in Matthew’s gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Eating the grain”
When the disciples plucked and ate the grain in a field they were walking through on the Sabbath (Luke 6:1), the Pharisees said that they were breaking the law of Moses. The Pharisees said this because they thought that the disciples were doing work by picking the grain, and so they were disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees did not think the disciples were stealing. That is because the law of Moses told farmers to allow travelers to pluck and eat small amounts of grain from plants in fields that they traveled through or near. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### The twelve disciples
The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:
In Matthew:
Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.
In Mark:
Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.
In Luke:
Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.
The man whom Luke calls Judas the son of James is probably the same man whom Matthew and Mark call Thaddaeus. However, you do not need to explain that in your translation or give both names. You can translate Luke’s list as he wrote it, and allow Bible teachers to explain the reason for the difference.
LUK 6 1 c4sa writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 6 1 x5zk translate-unknown σπορίμων 1 the grainfields These were large sections of land where people had scattered wheat seed in order to grow more wheat. Wheat is a kind of **grain** plant, and **grain** is a type of large grass that has edible seeds. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of plant, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “the areas where people were growing plants with edible seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
LUK 6 1 rl46 translate-unknown στάχυας 1 heads of grain The **heads** are the topmost part of the **grain** plant. They hold the mature, edible seeds. Alternate translation: “parts that held the seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -1041,7 +1041,7 @@ LUK 6 49 yu5r translate-unknown ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν χωρὶς θεμελ
LUK 6 49 bs8c ᾗ προσέρρηξεν ὁ ποταμός 1 against which the torrent of water flowed In this context, the word **flowed** indicates violent impact. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The floodwaters crashed against it”
LUK 6 49 q98t συνέπεσεν 1 collapsed Alternate translation: “it fell down” or “it came apart”
LUK 6 49 jm86 ἐγένετο τὸ ῥῆγμα τῆς οἰκίας ἐκείνης μέγα 1 the ruin of that house was great Your language may require you to say what was responsible for the **ruin** of the **house**. Alternate translation: “the floodwaters completely demolished that house”
-LUK 7 intro u8gj 0 # Luke 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus does miracles in Capernaum and Nain (7:1–17)
2. Jesus responds to messengers from John the Baptist and then teaches about John (7:18–35)
3. A woman anoints Jesus with perfume (7:36–50)
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. ULT does this with the quoted material in 7:27.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Centurion
A centurion was a Roman military commander. The centurion who asked Jesus to heal his slave (Luke 7:2) was doing some unusual things. A Roman soldier, especially an officer, would almost never go to a Jew for help, and most wealthy people did not love or care for their slaves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/centurion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### John’s Baptism
This chapter refers again to the baptism of John (7:29). John baptized people who wanted to show that they knew they were sinners and that they were sorry for their sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### “Sinners”
In 7:34, Jesus describes how the Pharisees said he was a friend of “sinners.” That was the name that the Pharisees used for people whom they thought were disobeying the law of Moses. In reality, it was the Pharisees who were sinful, since they rejected Jesus, the Savior whom God had sent. This situation can be understood as irony. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
### Washing feet
The feet of the people in the ancient Near East were very dirty because they wore sandals and the roads and trails were dusty in the dry season and muddy in the wet season. Only slaves washed other people’s feet. The woman who washed Jesus’ feet was showing him great honor.
+LUK 7 intro u8gj 0 # Luke 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus does miracles in Capernaum and Nain (7:1-17)
2. Jesus responds to messengers from John the Baptist and then teaches about John (7:18-35)
3. A woman anoints Jesus with perfume (7:36-50)
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. ULT does this with the quoted material in 7:27.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Centurion
A centurion was a Roman military commander. The centurion who asked Jesus to heal his slave (Luke 7:2) was doing some unusual things. A Roman soldier, especially an officer, would almost never go to a Jew for help, and most wealthy people did not love or care for their slaves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/centurion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### John’s Baptism
This chapter refers again to the baptism of John (7:29). John baptized people who wanted to show that they knew they were sinners and that they were sorry for their sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
### “Sinners”
In 7:34, Jesus describes how the Pharisees said he was a friend of “sinners.” That was the name that the Pharisees used for people whom they thought were disobeying the law of Moses. In reality, it was the Pharisees who were sinful, since they rejected Jesus, the Savior whom God had sent. This situation can be understood as irony. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
### Washing feet
The feet of the people in the ancient Near East were very dirty because they wore sandals and the roads and trails were dusty in the dry season and muddy in the wet season. Only slaves washed other people’s feet. The woman who washed Jesus’ feet was showing him great honor.
LUK 7 1 l343 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα αὐτοῦ 1 his words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. Alternate translation: “his teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
LUK 7 1 zi6w figs-idiom εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς τοῦ λαοῦ 1 in the hearing of the people This phrase is an idiom. Alternate translation: “as the people were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
LUK 7 1 l2zp writing-newevent εἰσῆλθεν εἰς Καφαρναούμ 1 he entered into Capernaum This reference to a location, **Capernaum**, introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “he went into the city of Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
@@ -1215,7 +1215,7 @@ LUK 7 49 ie4z figs-rquestion τίς οὗτός ἐστιν ὃς καὶ ἁμ
LUK 7 50 lje8 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “you have trusted in God, and God has saved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
LUK 7 50 l398 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Jesus speaks figuratively of the woman’s **faith** as if it had actively **saved** her. He means that it provided the conditions for her to receive salvation from God. Alternate translation: “you have trusted in God, and God has saved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
LUK 7 50 sp2u figs-explicit πορεύου εἰς εἰρήνην 1 Go in peace This was a way of saying goodbye while giving a blessing at the same time. It also reassured the woman, despite the disapproval of the religious leaders. Alternate translation: “May God give you peace as you go” or “You may go now, and do not worry about your sins anymore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK 8 intro ba3i 0 # Luke 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches the crowds with parables (8:1–21)
2. Jesus calms a storm on the Sea of Galilee (8:22–25)
3. Jesus drives out many demons from a man (8:26–39)
4. Jesus heals a woman and restores a dead girl to life (8:40–55)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Miracles
In this chapter, Jesus makes a storm stop by speaking to it, he makes a dead girl alive by speaking to her, and he makes evil spirits leave a man by speaking to them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Parables
Parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. But people who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message (Luke 8:4-15).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Brothers and sisters
Most people use the terms “brother” and “sister” for those who have the same parents as they do. They think of them as some of the most important people in their lives. Some people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter, Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “having spent all her living on doctors”
In [8:43](../08/43.md), some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “having spent all her living on doctors,” but other manuscripts do not. ULT includes the phrase in its text, but it mentions in a footnote that scholars are divided as to whether it was an original part of the book of Luke. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the phrase if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+LUK 8 intro ba3i 0 # Luke 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches the crowds with parables (8:1-21)
2. Jesus calms a storm on the Sea of Galilee (8:22-25)
3. Jesus drives out many demons from a man (8:26-39)
4. Jesus heals a woman and restores a dead girl to life (8:40-55)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Miracles
In this chapter, Jesus makes a storm stop by speaking to it, he makes a dead girl alive by speaking to her, and he makes evil spirits leave a man by speaking to them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Parables
Parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. But people who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message (Luke 8:4-15).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Brothers and sisters
Most people use the terms “brother” and “sister” for those who have the same parents as they do. They think of them as some of the most important people in their lives. Some people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter, Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “having spent all her living on doctors”
In [8:43](../08/43.md), some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “having spent all her living on doctors,” but other manuscripts do not. ULT includes the phrase in its text, but it mentions in a footnote that scholars are divided as to whether it was an original part of the book of Luke. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the phrase if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
LUK 8 1 i6mi writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 8 1 l399 figs-idiom κατὰ πόλιν καὶ κώμην 1 through city and village This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “around to different cities and villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
LUK 8 1 l401 figs-abstractnouns τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate this phrase in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “how God would rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1417,7 +1417,7 @@ LUK 8 54 e7zt writing-pronouns αὐτὸς…κρατήσας τῆς χειρ
LUK 8 54 l469 figs-imperative ἔγειρε 1 arise This was not a command that the girl was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused her to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “your life is restored, so get up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
LUK 8 55 k6w2 figs-explicit ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτῆς 1 her spirit returned The people of this time considered life to be the result of the spirit coming into a person. You could express this in the way that would be most meaningful in your culture. Alternate translation: “she started breathing again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 8 56 c6mp μηδενὶ εἰπεῖν 1 to tell no one If it would be clearer in your language, you could make the verb negative and the subject positive. Alternate translation: “not to tell anyone”
-LUK 9 intro uc1r 0 # Luke 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus sends his 12 apostles to teach and heal (9:1–9)
2. Jesus miraculously feeds 5,000 people (9:10–17)
3. Jesus speaks with his disciples about who he is (9:18–27)
4. The glory of Jesus is revealed on a mountaintop (9:28–36)
5. Jesus drives a demon out of a boy (9:37–43)
6. Jesus speaks about being his disciple (9:44–50)
7. Jesus begins to travel to Jerusalem (9:51–62)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Elijah
God had promised the Jews that the prophet Elijah would return before the Messiah came. So some people who saw Jesus do miracles thought Jesus was Elijah (9:9, 9:19). He was not. However, Elijah did come to earth to speak with Jesus (9:30). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])
### Glory
Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Luke says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever would save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for my sake will save it” (9:24).
### “Receiving”
This word appears several times in this chapter and means different things. When Jesus says, “If someone receives a little child like this in my name, he also is receiving me, and if someone receives me, he is also receiving the one who sent me” (9:48), he is speaking of people serving the child. When Luke says, “the people there did not receive him” (9:53), he means that the people did not believe in or accept Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
+LUK 9 intro uc1r 0 # Luke 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus sends his 12 apostles to teach and heal (9:1-9)
2. Jesus miraculously feeds 5,000 people (9:10-17)
3. Jesus speaks with his disciples about who he is (9:18-27)
4. The glory of Jesus is revealed on a mountaintop (9:28-36)
5. Jesus drives a demon out of a boy (9:37-43)
6. Jesus speaks about being his disciple (9:44-50)
7. Jesus begins to travel to Jerusalem (9:51-62)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Elijah
God had promised the Jews that the prophet Elijah would return before the Messiah came. So some people who saw Jesus do miracles thought Jesus was Elijah (9:9, 9:19). He was not. However, Elijah did come to earth to speak with Jesus (9:30). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])
### Glory
Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Luke says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever would save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for my sake will save it” (9:24).
### “Receiving”
This word appears several times in this chapter and means different things. When Jesus says, “If someone receives a little child like this in my name, he also is receiving me, and if someone receives me, he is also receiving the one who sent me” (9:48), he is speaking of people serving the child. When Luke says, “the people there did not receive him” (9:53), he means that the people did not believe in or accept Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
LUK 9 1 l470 figs-nominaladj συνκαλεσάμενος…τοὺς δώδεκα 1 when he had called the Twelve together See how you translated this in [8:1](../08/01.md). You may have decided to translate the nominal adjective **the Twelve** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “when he had called together his 12 apostles” or “when he had called together the 12 men whom he had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
LUK 9 1 l471 translate-names τοὺς δώδεκα 1 the Twelve You may have decided instead in [8:1](../08/01.md) to translate this as a title, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns. If so, you can do the same thing here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
LUK 9 1 zqq6 figs-doublet δύναμιν καὶ ἐξουσίαν 1 power and authority **Power** and **authority** mean similar things. Luke uses them together to show that Jesus gave his 12 disciples both the ability and the right to heal people. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this phrase with a combination of words that includes both of these ideas. Alternate translation: “the right to use power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -1620,7 +1620,7 @@ LUK 9 62 l548 figs-synecdoche οὐδεὶς ἐπιβαλὼν τὴν χεῖ
LUK 9 62 l553 translate-unknown οὐδεὶς ἐπιβαλὼν τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἄροτρον 1 No one, having put his hand on a plow A **plow** is a tool that farmers use to break up soil to prepare a field for planting. Plows have sharp, pointed prongs that dig into the soil. They usually have handles that the farmer uses to guide the plow. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of tool, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “No one who needs to go straight forward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
LUK 9 62 l549 figs-explicit βλέπων εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω 1 looking to the things behind The implication is that anyone who is looking backwards while plowing cannot guide the plow where it needs to go. That person must focus on looking forward in order to plow well. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “looking backwards, and so not going in the right direction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 9 62 l550 figs-abstractnouns εὔθετός ἐστιν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 is fit for the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “can really let God rule his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-LUK 10 intro z899 0 # Luke 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus sends seventy-two disciples to teach and heal (10:1–24)
2. Jesus tells the Parable of the Good Samaritan (10:25–37)
3. Jesus visits Mary and Martha (10:38–43)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Harvest
Harvest refers to the time when people gather in the food they have planted so they can eat some of it right away and store the rest for future use. Jesus uses this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about him so that those people can become part of God’s kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### Neighbor
The Jews helped their Jewish neighbors who needed help, and they expected their Jewish neighbors to help them. Jesus wanted them to understand that people who were not Jews were also their neighbors, so he told them a story about this (10:29-37). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “72”
In 10:1 and 10:17, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible read “72,” but others read “70.” ULT reads “72,” but it mentions in a footnote that scholars are divided as to which number was originally in the book of Luke.
### “Jesus”
In 10:39, many of the best ancient manuscripts read “Jesus,” but some read “the Lord.” ULT reads “Jesus.”
In both of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+LUK 10 intro z899 0 # Luke 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus sends seventy-two disciples to teach and heal (10:1-24)
2. Jesus tells the Parable of the Good Samaritan (10:25-37)
3. Jesus visits Mary and Martha (10:38-43)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Harvest
Harvest refers to the time when people gather in the food they have planted so they can eat some of it right away and store the rest for future use. Jesus uses this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about him so that those people can become part of God’s kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
### Neighbor
The Jews helped their Jewish neighbors who needed help, and they expected their Jewish neighbors to help them. Jesus wanted them to understand that people who were not Jews were also their neighbors, so he told them a story about this (10:29-37). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “72”
In 10:1 and 10:17, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible read “72,” but others read “70.” ULT reads “72,” but it mentions in a footnote that scholars are divided as to which number was originally in the book of Luke.
### “Jesus”
In 10:39, many of the best ancient manuscripts read “Jesus,” but some read “the Lord.” ULT reads “Jesus.”
In both of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
LUK 10 1 u8l6 writing-newevent μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα 1 And after these things Luke uses this phrase to mark a new event in the story. If your language has a similar expression that it uses for this same purpose, you can use that here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 10 1 l551 ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord Here Luke refers to Jesus by the title **the Lord** to show his authority. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus”
LUK 10 1 m75c translate-textvariants ἑβδομήκοντα δύο 1 72 See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to say **72** or “70” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
@@ -1817,7 +1817,7 @@ LUK 10 42 hqt4 figs-hyperbole ἑνός δέ ἐστιν χρεία 1 but one th
LUK 10 42 l632 figs-explicit ἑνός δέ ἐστιν χρεία 1 but one thing is necessary The implication is that this most important thing is what Jesus is teaching about God, and that Martha should have been concentrating on that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but one thing, what I am teaching about God, is more important than all the others, and you should have been concentrating on that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 10 42 l633 Μαριὰμ…τὴν ἀγαθὴν μερίδα ἐξελέξατο 1 Mary has chosen the good part While Jesus spoke just earlier about “one thing” as opposed to “many things,” here he seems to contrast only two things, **the good part** with another part, perhaps not “the bad part,” but at least the part that is not to be preferred. This likely refers to the two activities that Mary and Martha have chosen to pursue while Jesus is present in their home. Alternate translation: “Mary has chosen the better activity”
LUK 10 42 nzn8 figs-activepassive ἥτις οὐκ ἀφαιρεθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτῆς 1 which will not be taken away from her If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. This could mean one of two things. Alternate translation: (1) “I will not take that opportunity away from her” or (2) “God will not let her lose what she has gained from listening to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK 11 intro j6le 0 # Luke 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches about prayer (11:1–13)
2. Jesus teaches about driving out demons and other subjects (11:14–36)
3. Jesus criticizes the Pharisees and experts in the law (11:37–54)
ULT sets the lines in 11:2-4 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are a special prayer.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The Lord’s Prayer
When Jesus’ followers asked him to teach them how to pray, he taught them this prayer. He did not expect them to use the same words every time they prayed, but he did want them to know what God wanted them to pray about.
### Jonah
Jonah was an Old Testament prophet whom God sent to the Gentile city of Nineveh to tell the people there to repent. When he went and preached to them, they did repent. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
### Light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, that is, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. The Bible speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, that is, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### Washing
The Pharisees would wash themselves and the things they ate with. They would even wash things that were not dirty. The law of Moses did not tell them to wash those things, but they would wash them anyway. They did that because they thought that if they obeyed both the rules that God had made and some rules that their ancestors had added, God would think that they were better people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### Bread and stone, fish and snake
In 11:11, some ancient manuscripts have a longer reading, which also is found in Matthew 7:9. It says, “Which father among you, if your son asks for a loaf of bread, will give him a stone? Or a fish, will give him a snake?” ULT uses the shorter reading, which mentions just the fish and snake. This shorter reading is well attested to in many other ancient manuscripts. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to follow its reading. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+LUK 11 intro j6le 0 # Luke 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches about prayer (11:1-13)
2. Jesus teaches about driving out demons and other subjects (11:14-36)
3. Jesus criticizes the Pharisees and experts in the law (11:37-54)
ULT sets the lines in 11:2-4 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are a special prayer.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The Lord’s Prayer
When Jesus’ followers asked him to teach them how to pray, he taught them this prayer. He did not expect them to use the same words every time they prayed, but he did want them to know what God wanted them to pray about.
### Jonah
Jonah was an Old Testament prophet whom God sent to the Gentile city of Nineveh to tell the people there to repent. When he went and preached to them, they did repent. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
### Light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, that is, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. The Bible speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, that is, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### Washing
The Pharisees would wash themselves and the things they ate with. They would even wash things that were not dirty. The law of Moses did not tell them to wash those things, but they would wash them anyway. They did that because they thought that if they obeyed both the rules that God had made and some rules that their ancestors had added, God would think that they were better people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### Bread and stone, fish and snake
In 11:11, some ancient manuscripts have a longer reading, which also is found in Matthew 7:9. It says, “Which father among you, if your son asks for a loaf of bread, will give him a stone? Or a fish, will give him a snake?” ULT uses the shorter reading, which mentions just the fish and snake. This shorter reading is well attested to in many other ancient manuscripts. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to follow its reading. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
LUK 11 1 fl3j writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 11 1 l635 figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 John This disciple is referring to John the Baptist. You could say that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 11 2 n3pz guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ 1 Father Jesus is commanding the disciples to honor the name of God the Father by addressing him as **Father** when praying to him. This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -1967,7 +1967,7 @@ LUK 11 33 ht3v translate-unknown κρύπτην 1 a hidden place This expression
LUK 11 33 l699 translate-unknown τὸν μόδιον 1 the measure The term **the measure** refers to a container for dry material that had a capacity of about eight liters or about two gallons. You can represent the term in your translation with the name of a corresponding container in your culture. Alternate translation: “a basket” or “a bowl” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
LUK 11 33 hz46 figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν 1 but on the lampstand If it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply the understood subject and verb in this clause. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Instead, a person places a lighted lamp on a lampstand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
LUK 11 34 n1pg figs-metaphor ὁ λύχνος τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου 1 The lamp of the body is your eye The **eye** is a **lamp** in a figurative sense. It is not a source of light, but a channel of light. Alternate translation: “Your eye lets light into your body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK 11 34 l700 figs-youcrowd σου 1 your Even though Jesus is speaking to the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation, so **your** and **you** are singular in [11:34–36](../11/34.md). But if the singular form of these pronouns would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+LUK 11 34 l700 figs-youcrowd σου 1 your Even though Jesus is speaking to the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation, so **your** and **you** are singular in [11:34-36](../11/34.md). But if the singular form of these pronouns would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
LUK 11 34 rm2n figs-exmetaphor ὅταν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου ἁπλοῦς ᾖ, καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου φωτεινόν ἐστιν 1 When your eye is healthy, your whole body is also illuminated Jesus is drawing an extended comparison between physical vision and spiritual receptivity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the comparison. Alternate translation: “When your eye is healthy, it lets light into your whole body. In the same way, if you are willing to obey God, you will understand and live by his message for every part of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
LUK 11 34 td49 figs-exmetaphor ἐπὰν δὲ πονηρὸς ᾖ, καὶ τὸ σῶμά σου σκοτεινόν 1 But when it is bad, your body is also dark Jesus continues to draw an extended comparison between physical vision and spiritual receptivity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the comparison. Alternate translation: “But when your eye is unhealthy, it does not let light into any of your body. In the same way, if you are not willing to obey God, you will not understand and live by his message for any part of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
LUK 11 34 l701 ἐπὰν δὲ πονηρὸς ᾖ 1 But when it is bad In this context, Jesus is using the term **evil** to contrast with **healthy**, so it means “unhealthy.” Alternate translation: “But when your eye is unhealthy”
@@ -2040,7 +2040,7 @@ LUK 11 52 fj7x figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσήλθατε, καὶ
LUK 11 53 mld3 writing-endofstory κἀκεῖθεν ἐξελθόντος αὐτοῦ 1 After he went out from there In this verse and the next verse, Luke comments on what happened as a result of the episode he has just related. Alternate translation: “After Jesus left the Pharisee’s house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
LUK 11 54 mr32 figs-metaphor ἐνεδρεύοντες αὐτὸν θηρεῦσαί τι ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 lying in wait for him to trap something from his mouth Luke speaks figuratively of the scribes and Pharisees trying to find grounds to accuse Jesus as if they were hunters hiding behind cover in order to catch an animal. Luke then speaks figuratively of what Jesus was saying as if it were the animal that these hunters were trying to catch. Alternate translation: “listening carefully to Jesus to see if they could use something he said to accuse him of teaching the wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
LUK 11 54 l729 figs-metonymy τι ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 something from his mouth Luke figuratively describes what Jesus was saying by association with his **mouth**, by which he spoke these things. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK 12 intro jun3 0 # Luke 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches about trusting and honoring God (12:1–12)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who trusted in money (12:13–21)
3. Jesus teaches not to trust in money (12:22–34)
4. Jesus teaches about being ready for his return (12:35–59)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Blasphemy against the Holy Spirit”
Jesus says in 12:10 that anyone who blasphemes against the Holy Spirit will not be forgiven. This is a descriptive statement, not a prescriptive one. Jesus is not saying that if people happen to speak certain words, then God will refuse to forgive them, no matter how sorry they are afterwards. Rather, it is the Holy Spirit who brings conviction of sin and of the need to repent. “Blasphemy against the Holy Spirit” means attributing the influence of the Holy Spirit to evil powers, as the Pharisees did when they said in 11:15 that Jesus drove out demons by the power of Beelzebul, the ruler of demons. By definition, then, if a person thinks that the influence of the Holy Spirit is an evil influence, they will not respond to it, and so they will not experience conviction of sin, repent, and be forgiven. That is why people who “blaspheme against the Holy Spirit” will not be forgiven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])
### Servants
God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not. Jesus teaches about this in 12:34-40.
### Division
Jesus knew that those who did not choose to follow him would hate those who did choose to follow him. He also knew that most people love their families more than they love anyone else. So he wanted his followers to understand that following and pleasing him had to be more important to them than having their family love them. Jesus teaches about this in 12:49-53.
+LUK 12 intro jun3 0 # Luke 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches about trusting and honoring God (12:1-12)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who trusted in money (12:13-21)
3. Jesus teaches not to trust in money (12:22-34)
4. Jesus teaches about being ready for his return (12:35-59)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Blasphemy against the Holy Spirit”
Jesus says in 12:10 that anyone who blasphemes against the Holy Spirit will not be forgiven. This is a descriptive statement, not a prescriptive one. Jesus is not saying that if people happen to speak certain words, then God will refuse to forgive them, no matter how sorry they are afterwards. Rather, it is the Holy Spirit who brings conviction of sin and of the need to repent. “Blasphemy against the Holy Spirit” means attributing the influence of the Holy Spirit to evil powers, as the Pharisees did when they said in 11:15 that Jesus drove out demons by the power of Beelzebul, the ruler of demons. By definition, then, if a person thinks that the influence of the Holy Spirit is an evil influence, they will not respond to it, and so they will not experience conviction of sin, repent, and be forgiven. That is why people who “blaspheme against the Holy Spirit” will not be forgiven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])
### Servants
God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not. Jesus teaches about this in 12:34-40.
### Division
Jesus knew that those who did not choose to follow him would hate those who did choose to follow him. He also knew that most people love their families more than they love anyone else. So he wanted his followers to understand that following and pleasing him had to be more important to them than having their family love them. Jesus teaches about this in 12:49-53.
LUK 12 1 en8g writing-newevent ἐν οἷς 1 In those times Luke uses these words to mark the beginning of a new event. This phrase seems to refer back to [11:54](../11/54.md). Alternate translation: “While the scribes and Pharisees were still looking for a way to trap him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 12 1 c8yk grammar-connect-time-background ἐπισυναχθεισῶν τῶν μυριάδων τοῦ ὄχλου, ὥστε καταπατεῖν ἀλλήλους 1 when myriads of the crowd were gathered together Luke provides this background information to give the setting for the events he is about to describe. Alternate translation: “while tens of thousands of the common people were gathering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
LUK 12 1 l730 translate-unknown μυριάδων 1 myriads The word **myriads** is the plural of the Greek word “myriad,” which means ten thousand (10,000). You can express this number in the way that would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “tens of thousands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2249,7 +2249,7 @@ LUK 12 48 nn9c figs-activepassive δαρήσεται ὀλίγας 1 will be bea
LUK 12 48 qg96 figs-parallelism παντὶ…ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρ’ αὐτοῦ; καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολύ, περισσότερον αἰτήσουσιν αὐτόν 1 everyone to whom much has been given, much will be required from him, and to whom much has been provided, even more will be asked of him These two clauses mean the same thing. Jesus is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them, especially if putting both of them in your translation might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “if someone entrusts many resources to a person, he will expect that person to produce much from those resources” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
LUK 12 48 ehu9 figs-activepassive παντὶ…ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρ’ αὐτοῦ 1 everyone to whom much has been given, much will be required from him If it would be clearer in your language, you could use active verbal forms to express the meaning of the two passive verbal forms here. Alternate translation: “the master will require more of everyone to whom he has given much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
LUK 12 48 ir7m figs-activepassive ᾧ παρέθεντο πολύ, περισσότερον αἰτήσουσιν αὐτόν 1 to whom much has been provided, even more will be asked of him If it would be clearer in your language, you could use active verbal forms to express the meaning of the two passive verbal forms here. Alternate translation: “the master will ask even more of the one to whom he has given much property to care for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK 12 49 qy62 figs-metaphor πῦρ ἦλθον βαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 I came to throw fire upon the earth Jesus is speaking figuratively of the effects of his ministry and teaching. In context, since he says contrastingly in [12:51](../12/51.md) that he did not come to bring peace to the earth, **fire** likely represents the passionate responses to him, both favorable and unfavorable, that would lead to the divisions he describes in [12:52–53](../12/52.md). Alternate translation: “My coming will lead to conflict among people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK 12 49 qy62 figs-metaphor πῦρ ἦλθον βαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 I came to throw fire upon the earth Jesus is speaking figuratively of the effects of his ministry and teaching. In context, since he says contrastingly in [12:51](../12/51.md) that he did not come to bring peace to the earth, **fire** likely represents the passionate responses to him, both favorable and unfavorable, that would lead to the divisions he describes in [12:52-53](../12/52.md). Alternate translation: “My coming will lead to conflict among people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
LUK 12 49 l820 figs-metonymy τὴν γῆν 1 the earth Jesus says **the earth** figuratively to mean the people living on the earth. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
LUK 12 49 ygv3 figs-exclamations τί θέλω εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφθη 1 how I wish that it were already kindled This exclamation emphasizes how much Jesus wants this to happen. Alternate translation: “I wish very much that this fire were already lit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
LUK 12 49 ygx3 figs-metaphor τί θέλω εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφθη 1 how I wish that it were already kindled This exclamation continues the metaphor of **fire** as conflict. Alternate translation: “how I wish that people were already taking sides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2295,7 +2295,7 @@ LUK 12 58 l840 translate-unknown τῷ πράκτορι 1 the officer In the con
LUK 12 59 wi7m figs-hypo λέγω σοι 1 I say to you Jesus uses this expression to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples and the crowd. If you translated the previous verse as a hypothetical condition, you could translate this expression as an introduction to the result of that condition. Alternate translation: “If that happens, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
LUK 12 59 l841 figs-youcrowd λέγω σοι 1 I say to you Even though Jesus is speaking directly to the crowd, he is still addressing an individual situation, so **you** is singular here and in the rest of this verse. But if the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
LUK 12 59 i124 translate-bmoney καὶ τὸ ἔσχατον λεπτὸν 1 the very last lepton A **lepton** was the smallest and least valuable coin in circulation in this place and time. It was equivalent to about a tenth of an hour’s wage. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “the very last penny” or “every bit of money that your creditor demands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
-LUK 13 intro xaa2 0 # Luke 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches with parables (13:1–30)
2. Jesus speaks about Herod and Jerusalem (13:31–35)
## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Unknown events
The people and Jesus speak about two events that they knew about, but about which no one today knows anything except what Luke has written. These events are Pilate executing some Galileans in the temple, 13:1–2, and 18 people being killed when a tower collapsed in Jerusalem, 13:4. In your translation, you should tell your readers no more than what Luke tells about what happened. Your translation should tell only what Luke tells.
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Those who are least important will be first, and those who are most important will be last” (Luke 13:30)
+LUK 13 intro xaa2 0 # Luke 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches with parables (13:1-30)
2. Jesus speaks about Herod and Jerusalem (13:31-35)
## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Unknown events
The people and Jesus speak about two events that they knew about, but about which no one today knows anything except what Luke has written. These events are Pilate executing some Galileans in the temple, 13:1-2, and 18 people being killed when a tower collapsed in Jerusalem, 13:4. In your translation, you should tell your readers no more than what Luke tells about what happened. Your translation should tell only what Luke tells.
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Those who are least important will be first, and those who are most important will be last” (Luke 13:30)
LUK 13 1 t1fi grammar-connect-time-background δέ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what Jesus teaches next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
LUK 13 1 l842 writing-participants παρῆσαν…τινες ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ, ἀπαγγέλλοντες αὐτῷ 1 some were present at that time who were reporting to him Luke uses this phrase to introduce new characters into the story. Alternate translation: “There were some people present at that time who were telling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
LUK 13 1 wg2k figs-explicit ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ 1 at that time This implicitly means while Jesus was still teaching the crowds, as Luke said he was doing in [11:54](../11/54.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while he was still teaching the crowds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2308,7 +2308,7 @@ LUK 13 2 zfa8 figs-rquestion δοκεῖτε ὅτι 1 Do you think that Jesus i
LUK 13 2 l847 ἁμαρτωλοὶ παρὰ πάντας τοὺς Γαλιλαίους 1 more sinful than all the Galileans Alternate translation: “more sinful than all the other Galileans” or “the most sinful of all Galileans”
LUK 13 2 l848 ταῦτα πεπόνθασιν 1 they suffered this Alternate translation: “this happened to them”
LUK 13 3 xl6m οὐχί, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 No, I say to you Jesus uses this expression to emphasize what he is about to tell these people and the crowd. Alternate translation: “That is certainly not the case”
-LUK 13 3 a3ez figs-explicit πάντες ὁμοίως ἀπολεῖσθε 1 you will all perish in the same way This statement seems to be similar to the one that Jesus makes in [19:41–44](../19/41.md), in which he says that if the Jewish people reject him and instead follow violent false messiahs, this will bring them into conflict with the Romans and they will be destroyed. That seems to be the implicit meaning here as well, and you could say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “you too will be destroyed by the Romans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK 13 3 a3ez figs-explicit πάντες ὁμοίως ἀπολεῖσθε 1 you will all perish in the same way This statement seems to be similar to the one that Jesus makes in [19:41-44](../19/41.md), in which he says that if the Jewish people reject him and instead follow violent false messiahs, this will bring them into conflict with the Romans and they will be destroyed. That seems to be the implicit meaning here as well, and you could say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “you too will be destroyed by the Romans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 13 4 hj5w ἢ ἐκεῖνοι 1 Or those Jesus is giving a second example of people who suffered. Alternate translation: “Also consider those”
LUK 13 4 e2s8 figs-nominaladj ἐκεῖνοι οἱ δεκαοκτὼ 1 those 18 Jesus is using the adjective **18** (eighteen) as a noun in order to indicate a certain group of people. Alternate translation: “those 18 people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
LUK 13 4 p6r8 translate-names Σιλωὰμ 1 Siloam **Siloam** is the name of an area in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2463,7 +2463,7 @@ LUK 13 35 x4y6 οὐ μὴ με ἴδητέ ἕως ἥξει ὅτε εἴπη
LUK 13 35 l925 figs-idiom ἕως ἥξει ὅτε εἴπητε 1 until it comes when you say The expression **it comes** means “the time comes.” You could say that in your translation, or, if your language does not speak of time as “coming,” you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “until the time comes when you say” or “until the time when you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
LUK 13 35 l926 figs-quotesinquotes ὅτε εἴπητε, εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 when you say, ‘Blessed is the one who comes in the name of the Lord’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “when you say that the one who comes in the name of the Lord is blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
LUK 13 35 v6lj figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord God’s **name** figuratively represents his power and authority. Alternate translation: “as God’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-LUK 14 intro xk3w 0 # Luke 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus attends a banquet and tells a parable about a banquet (14:1–24)
2. Jesus teaches more about being his disciple (14:25–35)
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Parable
Jesus told the parable in Luke 14:15-24 to teach that the kingdom of God will be something that everyone can enjoy, but many people will refuse to be part of it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “For everyone who exalts himself will be humbled, and he who humbles himself will be exalted” (14:11).
+LUK 14 intro xk3w 0 # Luke 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus attends a banquet and tells a parable about a banquet (14:1-24)
2. Jesus teaches more about being his disciple (14:25-35)
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Parable
Jesus told the parable in Luke 14:15-24 to teach that the kingdom of God will be something that everyone can enjoy, but many people will refuse to be part of it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “For everyone who exalts himself will be humbled, and he who humbles himself will be exalted” (14:11).
LUK 14 1 dj2d writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 14 1 a3ya grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
LUK 14 1 l89x writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 he The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2493,7 +2493,7 @@ LUK 14 8 l937 translate-unknown μὴ κατακλιθῇς 1 do not recline to
LUK 14 8 l938 figs-metaphor τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν 1 the first place See how you translated this in [14:7](../14/07.md). Alternate translation: “in a seat for an honored guest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
LUK 14 8 t1r5 figs-activepassive ἐντιμότερός σου ᾖ κεκλημένος ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 a more honorable than you may have been invited by him If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the host may also have invited a person who is more important than you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
LUK 14 8 l939 figs-nominaladj ἐντιμότερός 1 a more honorable Jesus is using the comparative adjective **more honorable** as a noun. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “a person who is more important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-LUK 14 8 m5b9 figs-youcrowd σου 1 you Even though Jesus is speaking to the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular in [14:8–10](../14/08.md). But if the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
+LUK 14 8 m5b9 figs-youcrowd σου 1 you Even though Jesus is speaking to the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular in [14:8-10](../14/08.md). But if the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
LUK 14 9 l940 translate-unknown ἐλθὼν, ὁ σὲ καὶ αὐτὸν καλέσας 1 when the one who invited you and him arrives In this culture, the host would come into the banquet hall after all the guests were seated. If the practice is different in your culture, you can use a general expression in your translation here. Alternate translation: “when the person who invited both of you sees the seating arrangements” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
LUK 14 9 ecp7 figs-idiom ἄρξῃ μετὰ αἰσχύνης τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον κατέχειν 1 you will begin with shame to take the last place Jesus uses the term **begin** idiomatically to suggest slowly unfolding, reluctant action. Alternate translation: “you will be ashamed and reluctantly have to take the last place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
LUK 14 9 gqa6 figs-metaphor τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον 1 the last place The term **last** figuratively represents being unimportant and not honored. If your culture has a way of placing people at meals to show honor, you can use that in your translation. Otherwise, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a seat far from the host” or “a seat for the least important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2510,7 +2510,7 @@ LUK 14 11 zrs1 figs-activepassive ταπεινωθήσεται 1 will be humbled
LUK 14 11 dk2c ὁ ταπεινῶν ἑαυτὸν 1 the one who humbles himself Alternate translation: “who chooses to look unimportant” or “who takes an unimportant position”
LUK 14 11 eki7 figs-activepassive ὑψωθήσεται 1 will be exalted If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “will receive honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
LUK 14 12 p9hc τῷ κεκληκότι αὐτόν 1 the one who had invited him Alternate translation: “the Pharisee who had invited him to his house for a meal”
-LUK 14 12 v4uk figs-you ὅταν ποιῇς 1 when you make Even though this is general advice for everyone listening, the word **you** is singular here, and **you** and **your** are singular in all of [14:12–14](../14/12.md), because Jesus is speaking directly to the Pharisee who invited him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK 14 12 v4uk figs-you ὅταν ποιῇς 1 when you make Even though this is general advice for everyone listening, the word **you** is singular here, and **you** and **your** are singular in all of [14:12-14](../14/12.md), because Jesus is speaking directly to the Pharisee who invited him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
LUK 14 12 gmh6 figs-hyperbole μὴ φώνει 1 do not invite Jesus is probably not telling his host never to invite such people. Rather, this is likely a generalization that means he should invite others as well. Alternate translation: “do not invite only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
LUK 14 12 l945 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου…τοὺς συγγενεῖς σου 1 your brothers … your relatives The term **brothers** probably refers figuratively to close family members, while the term **relatives** likely indicates more distant members of an extended family. Alternate translation: “your close family members … other relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
LUK 14 12 l946 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου 1 your brothers If **brothers** is a figurative term, then Jesus is using it in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “your close family members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -2561,7 +2561,7 @@ LUK 14 23 l964 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν ὁ κύριος πρὸς τὸ
LUK 14 23 n9x7 figs-metonymy φραγμοὺς 1 hedges The word **hedges** describes boundary fences that enclose and protect fields and buildings. They may be made of bushes and shrubs growing closely together, or they may be made of wood or stone or similar building materials. This could mean: (1) actual hedges. In that case, you could use the equivalent term in your language or a general expression. Alternate translation: “boundary fences” or (2) since the term is paired with **roads**, it could figuratively mean the footpaths that run along hedges at the borders of fields. Alternate translation: “paths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
LUK 14 23 w5w6 figs-activepassive ἵνα γεμισθῇ μου ὁ οἶκος 1 so that my house may be filled If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that guests may fill my house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
LUK 14 24 i5lt figs-declarative λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper The master is using a future statement to express the result he desires from the instructions he has just given his servants. Alternate translation: “For I say to you that I do not want any of those men who were invited to taste of my supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
-LUK 14 24 v5m6 figs-you λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper While the word **you** is singular in [14:21–23](../14/21.md) because the master and the servant are addressing one another individually, here the word **you** is plural. It is not clear why. Possibly it may be assumed that other servants have been helping and that the master is now addressing all of the servants at once. In that case, it would make sense to translate **you** using the plural form, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+LUK 14 24 v5m6 figs-you λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper While the word **you** is singular in [14:21-23](../14/21.md) because the master and the servant are addressing one another individually, here the word **you** is plural. It is not clear why. Possibly it may be assumed that other servants have been helping and that the master is now addressing all of the servants at once. In that case, it would make sense to translate **you** using the plural form, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
LUK 14 24 ooz4 λέγω…ὑμῖν 1 I say to you The master says this to emphasize what he is telling his servants. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
LUK 14 24 l965 figs-quotesinquotes λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The master told all of his servants that he did not want any of the men he had invited to taste his supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
LUK 14 24 liz5 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων 1 those men Here, the word for **men** means “male adults,” not people in general. So it would be appropriate to use a specifically masculine term in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@@ -2606,12 +2606,12 @@ LUK 14 35 n5a9 writing-pronouns ἔξω βάλλουσιν αὐτό 1 They thro
LUK 14 35 u9h3 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize that what he has just said is important and that it may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **ears to hear** figuratively represents the willingness to understand and obey by association with the part of the body by which his listeners have been taking in his teaching. Alternate translation: “If anyone is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
LUK 14 35 c5fb figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, then listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
LUK 14 35 l981 figs-you ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear If you choose to translate this in the second person, **you** would be plural, since Jesus is speaking to the crowd. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-LUK 15 intro p1ba 0 # Luke 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus tells parables about a lost sheep, a lost coin, and a lost son (15:1–32)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The parable of the prodigal son
The story that Jesus tells in Luke 15:11-32 is known as The Parable of the Prodigal Son, although he does not give the story that title himself. Most interpreters understand the father in the story to represent God (the Father), the sinful younger son to represent those who repent and come to faith in Jesus, and the self-righteous older son to represent the Pharisees. In the story, the older son becomes angry at the father for forgiving the younger son’s sins. He will not even go in to the party that the father is giving to welcome the younger son home. Jesus knew that the Pharisees wanted God to think that only they were good and not forgive other people’s sins. Jesus was teaching them that they would never become part of God’s kingdom if they continued to think that way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
### Sinners
When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins such as stealing or sexual sins. But Jesus told three parables (15:4-7, 15:8-10, and 15:11-32) to teach that the people who acknowledge that they are sinners and who repent are the people who truly please God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
+LUK 15 intro p1ba 0 # Luke 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus tells parables about a lost sheep, a lost coin, and a lost son (15:1-32)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The parable of the prodigal son
The story that Jesus tells in Luke 15:11-32 is known as The Parable of the Prodigal Son, although he does not give the story that title himself. Most interpreters understand the father in the story to represent God (the Father), the sinful younger son to represent those who repent and come to faith in Jesus, and the self-righteous older son to represent the Pharisees. In the story, the older son becomes angry at the father for forgiving the younger son’s sins. He will not even go in to the party that the father is giving to welcome the younger son home. Jesus knew that the Pharisees wanted God to think that only they were good and not forgive other people’s sins. Jesus was teaching them that they would never become part of God’s kingdom if they continued to think that way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
### Sinners
When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins such as stealing or sexual sins. But Jesus told three parables (15:4-7, 15:8-10, and 15:11-32) to teach that the people who acknowledge that they are sinners and who repent are the people who truly please God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
LUK 15 1 yj6b grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
LUK 15 1 l982 writing-participants ἦσαν…αὐτῷ ἐγγίζοντες πάντες οἱ τελῶναι καὶ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ 1 all the tax collectors and sinners were coming to him to listen to him Luke uses this phrase to introduce new characters into the story. These people were part of the crowd that Luke described generally in [14:25](../14/25.md). Alternate translation: “many of the people who were coming to listen to Jesus were tax collectors and sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
LUK 15 1 ss52 figs-hyperbole ἦσαν…αὐτῷ ἐγγίζοντες πάντες οἱ τελῶναι καὶ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ 1 all the tax collectors and sinners were coming to him to listen to him The word **all** is an overstatement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many of the people who were coming to listen to Jesus were tax collectors and sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
LUK 15 2 l986 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to indicate the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-LUK 15 2 l987 writing-participants διεγόγγυζον οἵ τε Φαρισαῖοι καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 both the Pharisees and the scribes were grumbling Luke uses this phrase to reintroduce these characters into the story. While these may not be exactly the same individuals whom Jesus encountered in places such as [5:17–30](../05/17.md), the members of this group in general function as the same character throughout the story. Alternate translation: “some Pharisees and scribes were there, and they were grumbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+LUK 15 2 l987 writing-participants διεγόγγυζον οἵ τε Φαρισαῖοι καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 both the Pharisees and the scribes were grumbling Luke uses this phrase to reintroduce these characters into the story. While these may not be exactly the same individuals whom Jesus encountered in places such as [5:17-30](../05/17.md), the members of this group in general function as the same character throughout the story. Alternate translation: “some Pharisees and scribes were there, and they were grumbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
LUK 15 2 dd9b οὗτος ἁμαρτωλοὺς προσδέχεται 1 This one receives sinners Alternate translation: “This man lets sinners into his presence” or “This man associates with sinners”
LUK 15 2 ec2r figs-explicit οὗτος 1 This one This expression implicitly means Jesus. Alternate translation: “This man” or “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 15 3 l988 grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to indicate the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@@ -2734,7 +2734,7 @@ LUK 15 32 c35s ὁ ἀδελφός σου οὗτος 1 this brother of yours T
LUK 15 32 due5 figs-metaphor ὁ ἀδελφός σου οὗτος, νεκρὸς ἦν καὶ ἔζησεν 1 this brother of yours was dead, and lived See how you translated this figurative expression in [15:24](../15/24.md). Alternate translation: “it is as if your very own brother had died and come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
LUK 15 32 v55y figs-metaphor ἀπολωλὼς καὶ εὑρέθη 1 he had been lost, and was found See how you translated this figurative expression in [15:24](../15/24.md). Alternate translation: “it is as if he had been missing and we found him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
LUK 15 32 m046 figs-activepassive καὶ εὑρέθη 1 and was found If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “we found him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK 16 intro qz3g 0 # Luke 16 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus tells a parable about a household manager (16:1–15)
2. Jesus gives further teachings (16:16–18)
3. Jesus tells a parable about a rich man who died (16:19–31)
+LUK 16 intro qz3g 0 # Luke 16 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus tells a parable about a household manager (16:1-15)
2. Jesus gives further teachings (16:16-18)
3. Jesus tells a parable about a rich man who died (16:19-31)
LUK 16 1 m047 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what Jesus teaches next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
LUK 16 1 p54g writing-participants ἔλεγεν…καὶ πρὸς τοὺς μαθητάς 1 he also said to his disciples Luke uses this phrase to reintroduce these characters into the story. Jesus directed the previous three parables to the Pharisees and scribes, although **the disciples**may have been part of the crowd that was listening. He directs this next parable to **the disciples**. Alternate translation: “Jesus then said to his disciples, who were there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
LUK 16 1 r6ck figs-parables ἔλεγεν δὲ καὶ πρὸς τοὺς μαθητάς 1 And he also said to his disciples One theme of the story of the two sons was the use of possessions. To help his disciples understand something further about that, Jesus tells them a brief story that provides an illustration. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Jesus then told his disciples an illustrative story” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
@@ -2791,7 +2791,7 @@ LUK 16 13 ba2m ἑνὸς ἀνθέξεται 1 be devoted to one Alternate tra
LUK 16 13 dd9z τοῦ ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει 1 despise the other Alternate translation: “he will hold the second master in contempt” or “he will hate the second master”
LUK 16 13 pw7q figs-you οὐ δύνασθε…δουλεύειν 1 You are not able to serve Even though Jesus has been describing the situation of an individual servant, as he draws this application, he is addressing his disciples as a group, so **you** is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
LUK 16 14 taq3 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
-LUK 16 14 m067 writing-participants οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 1 the Pharisees Here Luke reintroduces **the Pharisees** as participants in the story, but they have been present all along. Jesus told them the three parables in [15:3–32](../15/03.md), and they have since been listening to what Jesus has been teaching his disciples. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees who were present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+LUK 16 14 m067 writing-participants οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 1 the Pharisees Here Luke reintroduces **the Pharisees** as participants in the story, but they have been present all along. Jesus told them the three parables in [15:3-32](../15/03.md), and they have since been listening to what Jesus has been teaching his disciples. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees who were present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
LUK 16 14 lbq9 φιλάργυροι ὑπάρχοντες 1 who were lovers of money Alternate translation: “who loved having money” or “who were very greedy for money”
LUK 16 15 zcqs ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ δικαιοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς 1 the ones justifying yourselves Alternate translation: “You are people who try to make yourselves look good”
LUK 16 15 m068 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 before men Jesus is using this expression to mean “where people can see,” and it refers figuratively to perception and judgment. Alternate translation: “from the perspective of others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2884,7 +2884,7 @@ LUK 16 31 xkr7 figs-metonymy Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1
LUK 16 31 m100 figs-merism Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is referring figuratively to all of God’s Word that had been written up to that time. He is using two of its major collections of writings to do so. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
LUK 16 31 m101 figs-activepassive οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 neither will they be persuaded if someone should rise from the dead If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “a dead person who came back to life would not be able to convince them either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
LUK 16 31 gf1b figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Abraham is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from among the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-LUK 17 intro c4am 0 # Luke 17 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches about forgiveness, faith, and service (17:1–10)
2. Jesus heals ten lepers (17:11–19)
3. Jesus teaches about the kingdom of God coming (17:20–37)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Old Testament Examples
Jesus uses Noah and Lot’s wife as examples to teach his followers. Noah was ready for the flood when it came, and followers of Jesus need to be ready for him to return, because he will not warn them when he is about to come. Lot’s wife loved the evil city she had been living in so much that God also punished her when he destroyed it. Followers of Jesus need to love him more than anything else. You may need to provide some background information that Jesus assumed his listeners would know so that people who read your translation today can understand what Jesus is teaching here.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical Questions
Jesus asks his disciples three questions in (17:7–9) to teach them that even those who serve him well are righteous only because of his grace. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever seeks to gain his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life will save it” (17:33).
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “In his day”
At the end of 17:24, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “in his day,” but the manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not. ULT does not have the phrase in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.
### “There will be two in the field”
Some ancient manuscripts of the Bible include the verse 17:36, but the manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not. ULT does not have this verse in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.
In both of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the verse if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+LUK 17 intro c4am 0 # Luke 17 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches about forgiveness, faith, and service (17:1-10)
2. Jesus heals ten lepers (17:11-19)
3. Jesus teaches about the kingdom of God coming (17:20-37)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Old Testament Examples
Jesus uses Noah and Lot’s wife as examples to teach his followers. Noah was ready for the flood when it came, and followers of Jesus need to be ready for him to return, because he will not warn them when he is about to come. Lot’s wife loved the evil city she had been living in so much that God also punished her when he destroyed it. Followers of Jesus need to love him more than anything else. You may need to provide some background information that Jesus assumed his listeners would know so that people who read your translation today can understand what Jesus is teaching here.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Rhetorical Questions
Jesus asks his disciples three questions in (17:7-9) to teach them that even those who serve him well are righteous only because of his grace. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever seeks to gain his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life will save it” (17:33).
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “In his day”
At the end of 17:24, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “in his day,” but the manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not. ULT does not have the phrase in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.
### “There will be two in the field”
Some ancient manuscripts of the Bible include the verse 17:36, but the manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not. ULT does not have this verse in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.
In both of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the verse if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
LUK 17 1 ej1e figs-doublenegatives ἀνένδεκτόν ἐστιν τοῦ τὰ σκάνδαλα μὴ ἐλθεῖν 1 It is impossible for traps not to come If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Traps will certainly come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
LUK 17 1 m102 translate-unknown τὰ σκάνδαλα 1 traps The term **traps** refers to a device that a person or animal would unknowingly activate and that would then confine them in a net, cage, or pit. Your language may have a term for a similar device, and you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
LUK 17 1 m103 figs-metaphor τὰ σκάνδαλα 1 traps Jesus is using the word **traps** figuratively. Alternate translation: “temptations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -3065,7 +3065,7 @@ LUK 17 37 fen1 writing-proverbs ὅπου τὸ σῶμα, ἐκεῖ καὶ ο
LUK 17 37 m193 figs-metaphor ὅπου τὸ σῶμα, ἐκεῖ καὶ οἱ ἀετοὶ ἐπισυναχθήσονται 1 Where the body is, there also the vultures will be gathered together In this proverb, **the body** and **the vultures** are figurative. If you would like to present the same image to your readers but your language does not use metaphors, you could express this as a simile. Alternate translation: “Just as vultures gather where there is a dead body, so the things I have described will indicate where this is about to happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
LUK 17 37 m6ca translate-unknown οἱ ἀετοὶ 1 the vultures The word **vultures** describes large birds that travel in flocks and eat the flesh of dead animals that they find. If your readers would not be familiar with **vultures**, you could use the name of similar birds in your area, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the scavenger birds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
LUK 17 37 m194 figs-activepassive ἐπισυναχθήσονται 1 will be gathered together If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “will flock together” or “will assemble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-LUK 18 intro v92v 0 # Luke 18 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus tells a parable about a widow and a judge (18:1–8)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a Pharisee and a tax collector (18:9–14)
3. Jesus blesses little children (18:15–17)
4. Jesus teaches about wealth and the kingdom of God (18:18–30)
5. Jesus warns about his impending death (18:31–34)
6. Jesus heals a blind man in Jericho (18:35–43)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Judges
People expected judges always to do what God said was right and to make sure that other people did what was right. But some judges did not care about doing right or making sure others did right. Jesus called this kind of judge “unjust.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])
### Pharisees and tax collectors
The Pharisees thought that they themselves were the best examples of good, righteous people, and they thought that tax collectors were the most unrighteous of sinners. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “that he had become sad”
At the beginning of 18:24, in the story of the ruler who asked Jesus how he could have eternal life, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible say that Jesus saw “that he had become sad.” However, the ancient manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not have that phrase. They say simply that Jesus looked at him. ULT does not have the phrase in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.
### “we have left everything”
In 18:28, in some ancient manuscripts of the Bible, Peter says that the disciples have left “everything” to follow Jesus. In other manuscripts, the expression is “our own possessions.” ULT says “everything” in its text, but it acknowledges the variant “our own possessions” in a footnote.
In each of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to follow its reading. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+LUK 18 intro v92v 0 # Luke 18 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus tells a parable about a widow and a judge (18:1-8)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a Pharisee and a tax collector (18:9-14)
3. Jesus blesses little children (18:15-17)
4. Jesus teaches about wealth and the kingdom of God (18:18-30)
5. Jesus warns about his impending death (18:31-34)
6. Jesus heals a blind man in Jericho (18:35-43)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Judges
People expected judges always to do what God said was right and to make sure that other people did what was right. But some judges did not care about doing right or making sure others did right. Jesus called this kind of judge “unjust.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])
### Pharisees and tax collectors
The Pharisees thought that they themselves were the best examples of good, righteous people, and they thought that tax collectors were the most unrighteous of sinners. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “that he had become sad”
At the beginning of 18:24, in the story of the ruler who asked Jesus how he could have eternal life, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible say that Jesus saw “that he had become sad.” However, the ancient manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not have that phrase. They say simply that Jesus looked at him. ULT does not have the phrase in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.
### “we have left everything”
In 18:28, in some ancient manuscripts of the Bible, Peter says that the disciples have left “everything” to follow Jesus. In other manuscripts, the expression is “our own possessions.” ULT says “everything” in its text, but it acknowledges the variant “our own possessions” in a footnote.
In each of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to follow its reading. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
LUK 18 1 r26t figs-parables ἔλεγεν δὲ παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς, πρὸς τὸ 1 Then he spoke a parable to them to show that Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told his disciples this story to help them understand that it was necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
LUK 18 2 l2qr λέγων 1 saying If it would be clearer in your language, you could begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said”
LUK 18 2 ph5w writing-participants κριτής τις ἦν ἔν τινι πόλει 1 In a certain city there was a certain judge Jesus uses this phrase to introduce one of the main characters in this parable. Alternate translation: “There once was a judge who lived in a certain city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
@@ -3227,7 +3227,7 @@ LUK 18 42 gcv1 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε
LUK 18 42 m257 ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Here Jesus seems to be using the word **saved** in one of its particular senses, to mean “healed.” Alternate translation: “Because you believed, you have been healed”
LUK 18 43 m258 ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ 1 he followed him Here, **followed** does not necessarily have the figurative meaning of “became a disciple.” Alternate translation: “he walked down the road with the rest of the crowd that was around Jesus”
LUK 18 43 d1kk δοξάζων τὸν Θεόν 1 glorifying God Alternate translation: “giving glory to God” or “praising God”
-LUK 19 intro zn2b 0 # Luke 19 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus helps a man named Zacchaeus repent of his sins (19:1–10)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who entrusted money to his servants (19:11–27)
3. Jesus rides into Jerusalem on a colt (19:28–48)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Sinner”
The Pharisees refer to a group of people as “sinners.” The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
### Servants
God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not.
### The donkey and the colt
Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.
Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that the disciples brought Jesus both a donkey and a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: Matthew 21:1-7 and Mark 11:1-7 and Luke 19:29-36 and John 12:14-15)
### Spreading garments and branches
When kings would enter the cities they ruled, people would cut branches from trees and take off the outer garments that they wore to stay warm in cold weather and spread them all on the road so the king would ride over them. They did this to honor the king and show that they loved him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/honor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
### The merchants in the temple
Jesus forced the people who were selling animals in the temple to leave. He did this to show everyone that he had authority over the temple and that only those who were righteous, who did what God said was good, could be in it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
+LUK 19 intro zn2b 0 # Luke 19 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus helps a man named Zacchaeus repent of his sins (19:1-10)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who entrusted money to his servants (19:11-27)
3. Jesus rides into Jerusalem on a colt (19:28-48)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Sinner”
The Pharisees refer to a group of people as “sinners.” The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
### Servants
God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not.
### The donkey and the colt
Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.
Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that the disciples brought Jesus both a donkey and a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: Matthew 21:1-7 and Mark 11:1-7 and Luke 19:29-36 and John 12:14-15)
### Spreading garments and branches
When kings would enter the cities they ruled, people would cut branches from trees and take off the outer garments that they wore to stay warm in cold weather and spread them all on the road so the king would ride over them. They did this to honor the king and show that they loved him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/honor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
### The merchants in the temple
Jesus forced the people who were selling animals in the temple to leave. He did this to show everyone that he had authority over the temple and that only those who were righteous, who did what God said was good, could be in it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
LUK 19 1 j35m grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
LUK 19 1 m259 translate-names Ἰερειχώ 1 Jericho **Jericho** is the name of a city. See how you translated it in [18:35](../18/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
LUK 19 2 m263 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke uses the term **behold** to calls the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -3431,10 +3431,10 @@ LUK 19 48 m347 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word
LUK 19 48 m348 οὐχ εὕρισκον τὸ τί ποιήσωσιν 1 they were not finding that which they might do Alternate translation: “they were not able to find a way to kill Jesus”
LUK 19 48 m349 figs-hyperbole ὁ λαὸς…ἅπας 1 all the people Luke is using the term **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “so many of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
LUK 19 48 pnf9 figs-metaphor ἐξεκρέμετο αὐτοῦ ἀκούων 1 were hanging on him listening Luke speaks figuratively of the people **hanging** on Jesus to emphasize how closely they were listening to what he said. Alternate translation: “were paying close attention to him to hear what he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-LUK 20 intro h6in 0 # Luke 20 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus answers a question about his authority (20:1–8)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who rented a vineyard to farmers (20:9–19)
3. Jesus answers a question about paying taxes to Caesar (20:20–26)
4. Jesus answers a question about marriage and the resurrection (20:27–40)
5. Jesus asks a challenging question about the Messiah (20:41–44)
6. Jesus warns about the scribes (20:45–47)
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in [20:17](../20/17.md) and [20:42-43](../20/42.md), which is quoted from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Questions that seem to have no good answer
In [20:4](../20/04.md), Jesus asks the Pharisees a question that seems to have no good answer. His goal is to show them that they should have recognized John the Baptist as someone who came with God’s authority. So he asks them who gave John the authority to baptize. They could not answer, because any answer they gave would show that they should have respected John [20:5-6](../20/05.md).
In [20:22](../20/22.md), the Pharisees ask Jesus a question that seems to have no good answer. They thought that they would get Jesus in trouble either with the Roman government or the Jewish people when they asked him if people should pay taxes to Caesar. If he said “yes,” then the Jewish people would be angry with him for telling them to pay taxes to a foreign government. If he said “no,” then the religious leaders could tell the Romans that Jesus was teaching the people to break the Roman laws. But Jesus gave them an answer they had not anticipated, and instead everyone respected the wisdom of Jesus even more.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a psalm that records David calling his son “lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, [Luke 20:41-44](../20/41.md), Jesus is trying to lead his hearers to the true understanding that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.”
+LUK 20 intro h6in 0 # Luke 20 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus answers a question about his authority (20:1-8)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who rented a vineyard to farmers (20:9-19)
3. Jesus answers a question about paying taxes to Caesar (20:20-26)
4. Jesus answers a question about marriage and the resurrection (20:27-40)
5. Jesus asks a challenging question about the Messiah (20:41-44)
6. Jesus warns about the scribes (20:45-47)
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in [20:17](../20/17.md) and [20:42-43](../20/42.md), which is quoted from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Questions that seem to have no good answer
In [20:4](../20/04.md), Jesus asks the Pharisees a question that seems to have no good answer. His goal is to show them that they should have recognized John the Baptist as someone who came with God’s authority. So he asks them who gave John the authority to baptize. They could not answer, because any answer they gave would show that they should have respected John [20:5-6](../20/05.md).
In [20:22](../20/22.md), the Pharisees ask Jesus a question that seems to have no good answer. They thought that they would get Jesus in trouble either with the Roman government or the Jewish people when they asked him if people should pay taxes to Caesar. If he said “yes,” then the Jewish people would be angry with him for telling them to pay taxes to a foreign government. If he said “no,” then the religious leaders could tell the Romans that Jesus was teaching the people to break the Roman laws. But Jesus gave them an answer they had not anticipated, and instead everyone respected the wisdom of Jesus even more.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a psalm that records David calling his son “lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, [Luke 20:41-44](../20/41.md), Jesus is trying to lead his hearers to the true understanding that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.”
LUK 20 1 h8gv writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 20 1 vtg4 figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Luke means that Jesus was teaching in the temple courtyard. Luke is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-LUK 20 1 m350 writing-participants ἐπέστησαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς σὺν τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις 1 the chief priests and the scribes approached with the elders Luke uses this statement to reintroduce these characters into the story. He mentioned their activity in opposition to Jesus as background information in [19:47–48](../19/47.md), but here he brings them back into the main action of the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+LUK 20 1 m350 writing-participants ἐπέστησαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς σὺν τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις 1 the chief priests and the scribes approached with the elders Luke uses this statement to reintroduce these characters into the story. He mentioned their activity in opposition to Jesus as background information in [19:47-48](../19/47.md), but here he brings them back into the main action of the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
LUK 20 2 m351 figs-imperative εἰπὸν ἡμῖν ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς, ἢ τίς ἐστιν ὁ δούς σοι τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην 1 Tell us by what authority you are doing these things, or who the one is who gave you this authority The Jewish leaders are using an imperative to ask a question, so you could translate this as a question. It may be helpful to make it two sentences. Alternate translation: “Tell us, by what authority are you doing these things? Or who is the one who gave you this authority?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
LUK 20 3 qn89 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς…εἶπεν 1 answering he said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus said what follows in response to the question from the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
LUK 20 3 ku6a ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς κἀγὼ λόγον καὶ εἴπατέ μοι 1 I also will ask you a word, and you say to me Jesus begins his response with a statement, but then he gives a command, **you say to me**. It might be helpful to make the statement one sentence and the command another sentence, leading into the next verse. Alternate translation: “I will also ask you a question. Now you tell me”
@@ -3617,7 +3617,7 @@ LUK 20 47 c7yv figs-metaphor οἳ κατεσθίουσιν τὰς οἰκία
LUK 20 47 g67x προφάσει μακρὰ προσεύχονται 1 for a pretext they pray at length Here, **pretext** refers to something that someone would do in order to appear a certain way. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly, they offer long prayers”
LUK 20 47 zpp5 figs-metonymy οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 These will receive greater condemnation Jesus is using the word **condemnation** figuratively to mean the punishment that a person would receive after being condemned (found guilty) for doing something wrong. Alternate translation: “These scribes will receive greater punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
LUK 20 47 zpx5 figs-explicit οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 These will receive greater condemnation The implication seems to be that these proud and greedy scribes will receive **greater** punishment than they would have if they had not pretended to be so godly. It is also implicit that God will be the one who punishes them. Alternate translation: “God will punish these scribes more severely because they do all these wrong things while pretending to be godly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK 21 intro ny7d 0 # Luke 21 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches about a widow who gave her little money to God (21:1–4)
2. Jesus tells his disciples what will happen before he returns (21:5–38)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “the times of the nations”
The Jews spoke of the time between when the Babylonians forced their ancestors to go to Babylon and the time when the Messiah would come as “the times of the nations.” In this expression, the term “nations” means people groups who are not Jews, that is, the Gentiles. So this expression meant the time when the Gentiles ruled over the Jews.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. There is a paradox in this chapter. Jesus tells his disciples in [21:16](../21/16.md), “they will put to death some of you,” but then, in [21:18](../21/18.md), he tells them, “not even a hair of your head will perish.” As a note to [21:18](../21/18.md) explains, Jesus means this second statement in a spiritual sense.
+LUK 21 intro ny7d 0 # Luke 21 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus teaches about a widow who gave her little money to God (21:1-4)
2. Jesus tells his disciples what will happen before he returns (21:5-38)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “the times of the nations”
The Jews spoke of the time between when the Babylonians forced their ancestors to go to Babylon and the time when the Messiah would come as “the times of the nations.” In this expression, the term “nations” means people groups who are not Jews, that is, the Gentiles. So this expression meant the time when the Gentiles ruled over the Jews.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Paradox
A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. There is a paradox in this chapter. Jesus tells his disciples in [21:16](../21/16.md), “they will put to death some of you,” but then, in [21:18](../21/18.md), he tells them, “not even a hair of your head will perish.” As a note to [21:18](../21/18.md) explains, Jesus means this second statement in a spiritual sense.
LUK 21 1 k2zb writing-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
LUK 21 1 m425 writing-newevent εἶδεν τοὺς βάλλοντας εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον τὰ δῶρα αὐτῶν πλουσίους 1 he saw the rich who were putting their gifts into the treasury This background information that Luke provides introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “he noticed that there were some rich people who were placing gifts of money in the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
LUK 21 1 m428 figs-nominaladj τοὺς…πλουσίους 1 the rich Jesus is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “rich people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -3779,7 +3779,7 @@ LUK 21 36 m487 figs-metaphor καὶ σταθῆναι ἔμπροσθεν το
LUK 21 36 h83d figs-metaphor καὶ σταθῆναι ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 and to stand before the Son of Man Here, **stand** is an idiom that means to be declared innocent when judged, as in [Psalm 130:3](../psa/130/03.md), “If you, Yahweh, would mark iniquities, Lord, who could stand?” (That is, “If you, Yahweh, kept a record of sins, no one would be declared innocent.”) Jesus is referring to the time when he will judge everyone. Alternate translation: “and so that the Son of Man will declare you innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
LUK 21 36 m488 figs-123person τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the Son of Man” or “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
LUK 21 36 m489 figs-explicit τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK 21 37 tfe8 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce information about ongoing action that continues after the part of the story in [20:1–21:36](../20/01.md) ends. You language may have its own way of showing how such information is related to the preceding part of a story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
+LUK 21 37 tfe8 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce information about ongoing action that continues after the part of the story in [20:1-21:36](../20/01.md) ends. You language may have its own way of showing how such information is related to the preceding part of a story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
LUK 21 37 zh1m figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Luke means that Jesus was teaching in the temple courtyard. Luke is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
LUK 21 37 m490 figs-activepassive τὸ ὄρος τὸ καλούμενον Ἐλαιῶν 1 the hill that is called Olivet If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
LUK 21 37 m491 translate-names τὸ ὄρος τὸ καλούμενον Ἐλαιῶν 1 the hill that is called Olivet You could also translate this entire expression as a proper name. **Olivet** is the name of a hill or mountain. See how you translated it in [19:29](../19/29.md). Alternate translation: “the Mount of Olives” or “Olive Tree Mountain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -3787,7 +3787,7 @@ LUK 21 38 m492 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 all the people The word **
LUK 21 38 bky8 figs-ellipsis ὤρθριζεν πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 were getting up early to him Here Luke is leaving out some words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “were getting up early to come to him” or “were coming to him starting early each morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
LUK 21 38 cbx2 figs-explicit ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ 1 to hear him The implication is that the people wanted to **hear** Jesus teach. Alternate translation: “to listen to him teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 21 38 m493 figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Luke figuratively means the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-LUK 22 intro y8nr 0 # Luke 22 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Judas Iscariot agrees to betray Jesus to his enemies (22:1–6)
2. Jesus shares the Passover meal with his disciples (22:7–38)
3. Jesus prays on the Mount of Olives and is arrested there (22:39–53)
4. Peter denies Jesus (22:54–62)
5. Soldiers mock Jesus and the Jewish leaders question him (22:63–71)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus
[22:14-20](../22/14.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This cup is the new covenant in my blood.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking figuratively and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.
### The new covenant
Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “And an angel from heaven appeared to him … his sweat became like drops of blood falling on the ground”
Verses 43 and 44 of Luke 22 are not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so they are likely not an original part of the gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider them to provide accurate accounts of real events in Jesus’ life that were preserved in oral or written traditions about him and copied into the book of Luke at an early stage. ULT and UST include these verses, but some other versions do not. If you decide to translate these verses, you should put them inside square brackets to indicate that they are probably not original to Luke’s gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+LUK 22 intro y8nr 0 # Luke 22 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Judas Iscariot agrees to betray Jesus to his enemies (22:1-6)
2. Jesus shares the Passover meal with his disciples (22:7-38)
3. Jesus prays on the Mount of Olives and is arrested there (22:39-53)
4. Peter denies Jesus (22:54-62)
5. Soldiers mock Jesus and the Jewish leaders question him (22:63-71)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus
[22:14-20](../22/14.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This cup is the new covenant in my blood.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking figuratively and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.
### The new covenant
Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “And an angel from heaven appeared to him … his sweat became like drops of blood falling on the ground”
Verses 43 and 44 of Luke 22 are not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so they are likely not an original part of the gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider them to provide accurate accounts of real events in Jesus’ life that were preserved in oral or written traditions about him and copied into the book of Luke at an early stage. ULT and UST include these verses, but some other versions do not. If you decide to translate these verses, you should put them inside square brackets to indicate that they are probably not original to Luke’s gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
LUK 22 1 q8fa grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
LUK 22 1 jjy9 figs-explicit ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the Festival of Unleavened Bread During this festival the Jews did not eat bread that was made with yeast. You could translate this as either a description or as a name. Alternate translation: “the festival during which the Jews did not eat any bread that was made with yeast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 22 1 m494 figs-activepassive ἡ λεγομένη Πάσχα 1 which is called the Passover If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which people call Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3887,7 +3887,7 @@ LUK 22 27 mw2l grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Jesus uses this word t
LUK 22 27 jt7r figs-rquestion τίς…μείζων, ὁ ἀνακείμενος ἢ ὁ διακονῶν? 1 who is greater, the one who reclines to eat, or the one who serves? Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I want you to think about who is greater, the person who is dining, or the who is serving the food.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
LUK 22 27 n3dl translate-unknown ὁ ἀνακείμενος 1 the one who reclines to eat See how you translated this in [5:29](../05/29.md). It was the custom in this culture for dinner guests to eat while lying comfortably around the table on banqueting couches. Alternate translation: “the person who is dining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
LUK 22 27 lu3a figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ὁ ἀνακείμενος? 1 Is it not the one who reclines to eat? Jesus is using a further question to teach his disciples. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “You must agree that it is the person who is dining.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-LUK 22 27 qbn6 figs-explicit ἐγὼ δὲ ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν εἰμι ὡς ὁ διακονῶν 1 But I am in the midst of you as one who serves Jesus is likely referring to the example that he has set at this meal. This would include serving the bread to the disciples, which Luke describes in [22:19](../22/19.md). John [13:4–5](../jhn/13/04.md) also records that before this meal, Jesus washed the disciples feet, which a household servant would ordinarily have done. Alternate translation: “But I have been acting like a servant here at this meal with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK 22 27 qbn6 figs-explicit ἐγὼ δὲ ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν εἰμι ὡς ὁ διακονῶν 1 But I am in the midst of you as one who serves Jesus is likely referring to the example that he has set at this meal. This would include serving the bread to the disciples, which Luke describes in [22:19](../22/19.md). John [13:4-5](../jhn/13/04.md) also records that before this meal, Jesus washed the disciples feet, which a household servant would ordinarily have done. Alternate translation: “But I have been acting like a servant here at this meal with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 22 28 i9xb οἱ διαμεμενηκότες μετ’ ἐμοῦ, ἐν τοῖς πειρασμοῖς μου 1 the ones who have continued with me in my trials Alternate translation: “the ones who have stayed with me through my struggles”
LUK 22 29 w4pd κἀγὼ διατίθεμαι ὑμῖν, καθὼς διέθετό μοι ὁ Πατήρ μου βασιλείαν 1 And I grant to you, just as my Father has granted to me, a kingdom If it would be clearer in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “And so, just as my Father has given a kingdom to me, I am giving one to you”
LUK 22 29 nly5 figs-abstractnouns κἀγὼ διατίθεμαι ὑμῖν, καθὼς διέθετό μοι ὁ Πατήρ μου βασιλείαν 1 And I grant to you, just as my Father has granted to me, a kingdom If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “And so I am giving you the authority to rule, just as my Father has done for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -4056,7 +4056,7 @@ LUK 22 71 m595 figs-exclusive ἔχομεν…αὐτοὶ…ἠκούσαμεν
LUK 22 71 m596 grammar-connect-logic-result αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 For we ourselves have heard from his own mouth If it would be clearer in your language, you put this phrase before the previous phrase, as UST does, since this phrase gives the reason for the conclusion that the previous phrase states. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
LUK 22 71 lpm4 figs-metonymy ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 we … have heard from his own mouth The elders are using the expression **his own mouth** figuratively to refer to what Jesus has just said using his mouth. Alternate translation: “we … have heard what he just said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
LUK 22 71 m597 figs-explicit ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 we … have heard from his own mouth The implications are that what Jesus has just said proves a charge of blasphemy by itself, because Jesus has claimed to be equal with God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we have heard him say that he is equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK 23 intro p6wq 0 # Luke 23 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus stands trial before Pilate and Herod (23:1–25)
2. The Roman soldiers crucify Jesus (23:26–49)
3. Joseph of Arimathea buries Jesus and women prepare spices (23:50–56)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”
The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.
### The tomb
The tomb in which Jesus was buried (Luke 23:53) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise”
There are two translation issues related to the statement, “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise” in [23:42](../23/42.md).
(1) When Jesus said this to the criminal who was crucified with him, it is possible that he was using the term **paradise** figuratively to mean “heaven,” describing it by association with the way that it is a place of comfort and consolation. Some groups of believers would understand it that way. However, other groups of believers would say that people who express their faith in Jesus, as this criminal did, still need to wait until the final resurrection before they go to heaven, and so **paradise** refers to a place where such people go when they die and await the final resurrection. Be sensitive to this difference in your translation. You may decide it is best simply to use the term **paradise** and leave the meaning open to either understanding. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
(2) Some groups that may be active in your area, such as the Jehovah’s Witnesses, do not honor Jesus as the Son of God, and so they do not believe that he would have been able to promise the criminal entrance into paradise with himself that day, when they both would die. And so they translate or punctuate this so that the word **today** describes when Jesus is making the statement, rather than when the criminal will be in paradise. However, if that were actually the case, the Greek wording and word order would be different. The expression that introduces the statement would be, “Truly, today, I say to you,” or, “Truly I say to you today that.” The actual expression, “Truly I say to you,” occurs ten times in the book of Luke, and it always stands by itself as an introduction to a statement that follows. So **today** belongs with the statement, not with the introduction to the statement. Your language may have a way of making this clear, for example, by saying, “Truly I say to you, you will be with me in paradise today.”
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “And he was obligated to release one to them at every feast” [23:17](../23/17.md)
This verse is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible. Most scholars consider it to be a later addition for explanation. Many current versions of the Bible do not include it. Some versions put it into square brackets. We recommend that you do not translate this verse. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that include this verse, you may include it.
### “Jesus said, ‘Father, forgive them, for they do not know what they are doing.’” [23:34](../23/34.md)
This sentence is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so it is likely not an original part of the gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider it an authentic saying of Jesus that was copied into the book at an early stage. ULT and UST include this sentence in this verse, but some other versions do not.
If you decide to include either [23:17](../23/17.md) or the additional sentence [23:34](../23/34.md) in your translation, you should enclose the material in square brackets to indicate that it is probably not original to Luke’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+LUK 23 intro p6wq 0 # Luke 23 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Jesus stands trial before Pilate and Herod (23:1-25)
2. The Roman soldiers crucify Jesus (23:26-49)
3. Joseph of Arimathea buries Jesus and women prepare spices (23:50-56)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”
The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.
### The tomb
The tomb in which Jesus was buried (Luke 23:53) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise”
There are two translation issues related to the statement, “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise” in [23:42](../23/42.md).
(1) When Jesus said this to the criminal who was crucified with him, it is possible that he was using the term **paradise** figuratively to mean “heaven,” describing it by association with the way that it is a place of comfort and consolation. Some groups of believers would understand it that way. However, other groups of believers would say that people who express their faith in Jesus, as this criminal did, still need to wait until the final resurrection before they go to heaven, and so **paradise** refers to a place where such people go when they die and await the final resurrection. Be sensitive to this difference in your translation. You may decide it is best simply to use the term **paradise** and leave the meaning open to either understanding. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
(2) Some groups that may be active in your area, such as the Jehovah’s Witnesses, do not honor Jesus as the Son of God, and so they do not believe that he would have been able to promise the criminal entrance into paradise with himself that day, when they both would die. And so they translate or punctuate this so that the word **today** describes when Jesus is making the statement, rather than when the criminal will be in paradise. However, if that were actually the case, the Greek wording and word order would be different. The expression that introduces the statement would be, “Truly, today, I say to you,” or, “Truly I say to you today that.” The actual expression, “Truly I say to you,” occurs ten times in the book of Luke, and it always stands by itself as an introduction to a statement that follows. So **today** belongs with the statement, not with the introduction to the statement. Your language may have a way of making this clear, for example, by saying, “Truly I say to you, you will be with me in paradise today.”
## Important textual issues in this chapter
### “And he was obligated to release one to them at every feast” [23:17](../23/17.md)
This verse is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible. Most scholars consider it to be a later addition for explanation. Many current versions of the Bible do not include it. Some versions put it into square brackets. We recommend that you do not translate this verse. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that include this verse, you may include it.
### “Jesus said, ‘Father, forgive them, for they do not know what they are doing.’” [23:34](../23/34.md)
This sentence is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so it is likely not an original part of the gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider it an authentic saying of Jesus that was copied into the book at an early stage. ULT and UST include this sentence in this verse, but some other versions do not.
If you decide to include either [23:17](../23/17.md) or the additional sentence [23:34](../23/34.md) in your translation, you should enclose the material in square brackets to indicate that it is probably not original to Luke’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
LUK 23 1 pi3d grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to indicate that this event came after the events he has just described. Alternate translation (as in UST): “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
LUK 23 1 sgf1 figs-hyperbole ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος αὐτῶν 1 the whole multitude of them The word **whole** is a generalization. Luke says in [23:51](../23/51.md) that at least one member of the Sanhedrin did not agree that Jesus was guilty of blasphemy and should be punished. Alternate translation: “the many members of the ruling council who wanted to condemn Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
LUK 23 1 mvn9 figs-metonymy ἀναστὰν 1 rose up This means literally that they “stood up” or “stood to their feet,” but figuratively by extension it means that they adjourned the meeting and left the meeting place. Alternate translation: “ended the meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -4164,7 +4164,7 @@ LUK 23 30 m625 figs-quotesinquotes λέγειν τοῖς ὄρεσιν, πέσ
LUK 23 30 m626 figs-imperative πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς…καλύψατε ἡμᾶς 1 Fall on us … Cover us This is an imperative, but since the people cannot order the mountains and hills to do this, they would be using the imperative to express their wishes. Alternate translation: “We wish you would fall on us … We wish you would cover us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
LUK 23 30 m627 figs-explicit πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς…καλύψατε ἡμᾶς 1 Fall on us … Cover us The people do not want the mountains and hills to fall on them to harm them, but rather to protect them. Alternate translation: “We wish you would fall on us to protect us … We wish you would cover us to protect us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 23 30 m628 figs-exclusive πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς…καλύψατε ἡμᾶς 1 Fall on us … Cover us When the people say **us**, they are referring to themselves only, not to the mountains and hills as well. So here, use the exclusive form of **us** if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-LUK 23 31 nkk3 figs-metaphor ὅτι εἰ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ, ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν; ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ, τί γένηται? 1 For if they do these things in the moist tree, what will happen in the dry? This is a figure of speech based on the idea that dry wood catches fire much more easily than moist wood. The fire, in turn, represents terrible things that people will experience. Jesus is saying that under the present relatively stable conditions, it was difficult for his enemies to arrest him and sentence him to death. In the future, conditions will become so desperate and chaotic that people will be able to do much worse things much more easily. He is probably referring to what conditions will be like during the siege and destruction of Jerusalem, which he described in [21:20–24](../21/20.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the meaning of this metaphor in your translation, and you could represent the metaphor itself as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “If people are able to do this when conditions are good, what will they do when conditions become very bad?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+LUK 23 31 nkk3 figs-metaphor ὅτι εἰ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ, ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν; ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ, τί γένηται? 1 For if they do these things in the moist tree, what will happen in the dry? This is a figure of speech based on the idea that dry wood catches fire much more easily than moist wood. The fire, in turn, represents terrible things that people will experience. Jesus is saying that under the present relatively stable conditions, it was difficult for his enemies to arrest him and sentence him to death. In the future, conditions will become so desperate and chaotic that people will be able to do much worse things much more easily. He is probably referring to what conditions will be like during the siege and destruction of Jerusalem, which he described in [21:20-24](../21/20.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the meaning of this metaphor in your translation, and you could represent the metaphor itself as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “If people are able to do this when conditions are good, what will they do when conditions become very bad?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
LUK 23 31 y238 figs-rquestion ὅτι εἰ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ, ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν; ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ, τί γένηται? 1 For if they do these things in the moist tree, what will happen in the dry? Jesus does not expect the women to tell him what people will do in the future. Rather, he is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Since people are doing this when conditions are good, they will certainly do much worse when conditions become very bad!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
LUK 23 31 m629 writing-pronouns ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν 1 they do these things Here Jesus is using the pronoun **they** in an indefinite sense. Alternate translation: “people are doing these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
LUK 23 31 m630 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ 1 in the moist tree This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “when the wood is fresh” or “when the wood is wet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -4254,8 +4254,8 @@ LUK 23 48 yq19 figs-nominaladj θεωρήσαντες τὰ γενόμενα 1 h
LUK 23 48 whs7 figs-explicit ὑπέστρεφον 1 returned The implication is that the people in the crowds **returned** to their homes. Alternate translation: “returned to their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 23 48 ft9q translate-symaction τύπτοντες τὰ στήθη 1 beating their breasts As in [18:13](../18/13.md), this was a physical expression of great sorrow. Alternate translation: “hitting their chests to express their great sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
LUK 23 49 m669 figs-nominaladj πάντες οἱ γνωστοὶ αὐτῷ 1 all the ones acquainted with him Luke is using the adjective **acquainted** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “all the people who knew Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-LUK 23 49 m670 figs-explicit πάντες οἱ γνωστοὶ αὐτῷ 1 all the ones acquainted with him These means implicitly all the people in the crowd that had come to watch the crucifixion who knew Jesus. It does not mean the disciples, since they had fled and were hiding. Rather, it means other people in Jerusalem who knew Jesus personally, which could include people such as the ones who lent him the colt in [19:30–33](../19/30.md) and the one who provided the room for the Passover meal in [22:11–13](../22/11.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the people in the crowd who knew Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-LUK 23 49 xzh8 figs-explicit γυναῖκες αἱ συνακολουθοῦσαι αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 the women who followed him from Galilee Here, **followed** does not have the figurative meaning of “became a disciple.” Rather, the implication is that the women whom Luke describes in [8:2–3](../08/02.md), who accompanied Jesus and his disciples and provided for them out of their own means, had traveled with the group here to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the women who helped Jesus and his disciples, who had traveled with him from Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK 23 49 m670 figs-explicit πάντες οἱ γνωστοὶ αὐτῷ 1 all the ones acquainted with him These means implicitly all the people in the crowd that had come to watch the crucifixion who knew Jesus. It does not mean the disciples, since they had fled and were hiding. Rather, it means other people in Jerusalem who knew Jesus personally, which could include people such as the ones who lent him the colt in [19:30-33](../19/30.md) and the one who provided the room for the Passover meal in [22:11-13](../22/11.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the people in the crowd who knew Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+LUK 23 49 xzh8 figs-explicit γυναῖκες αἱ συνακολουθοῦσαι αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 the women who followed him from Galilee Here, **followed** does not have the figurative meaning of “became a disciple.” Rather, the implication is that the women whom Luke describes in [8:2-3](../08/02.md), who accompanied Jesus and his disciples and provided for them out of their own means, had traveled with the group here to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the women who helped Jesus and his disciples, who had traveled with him from Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 23 49 s74u ταῦτα 1 these things Alternate translation: “what happened”
LUK 23 50 cbj7 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke uses the term **behold** to call the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
LUK 23 50 ud7p writing-participants ἀνὴρ ὀνόματι Ἰωσὴφ, βουλευτὴς ὑπάρχων, ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς καὶ δίκαιος 1 a man named Joseph was a council member, a good and righteous man Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. It may be helpful to make this more than one sentence. Alternate translation: “there was a man named Joseph who was a member of the Sanhedrin. He was a good and righteous man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
@@ -4286,11 +4286,11 @@ LUK 23 56 mj6q figs-explicit ἡτοίμασαν ἀρώματα καὶ μύρ
LUK 23 56 m681 translate-unknown ἀρώματα καὶ μύρα 1 spices and ointments The **spices** were sweet-smelling substances that were dry, and the **ointments** were sweet-smelling substances that were moist. If your readers would not be familiar with **spices and ointments**, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “sweet-smelling substances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
LUK 23 56 uzk9 ἡσύχασαν 1 they rested Alternate translation: “the women did not do any work”
LUK 23 56 tk6s κατὰ τὴν ἐντολήν 1 according to the commandment Alternate translation: “as Moses had commanded in the law”
-LUK 24 intro r5qx 0 # Luke 24 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. The women go to Jesus’ tomb and find it empty (24:1–12)
2. Two disciples meet Jesus on a journey to Emmaus (24:13–35)
3. Jesus, risen from the dead, appears to his disciples (24:36–53)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The loyalty of the women
Many of Luke’s original readers would have thought that women were less important than men. But Luke carefully demonstrates that some women who loved Jesus very much showed him greater loyalty than the twelve disciples did. While the disciples ran away and hid, the women lovingly cared for Jesus’ body, and as a result, they were the first to learn that he had risen from the dead.
### Resurrection
Luke wants his readers to understand that Jesus came alive again in a physical body ([Luke 24:38-43](../24/38.md)).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “the third day”
This expression occurs three times in this chapter, in [24:7](../24/07.md), [24:21](../24/21.md), and [24:46](../24/46.md). See the explanation of this expression in the note to Luke [18:33](../18/33.md). In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” By that way of reckoning time, since Jesus died on a Friday, when he rose from the dead on a Sunday, that was the “third day.”
### Two men in bright shining robes
Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all write about angels in white clothing speaking with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Matthew and John call them angels, while Mark and Luke call them men, but that is only because the angels appeared in human form. Luke and John write about both angels, while Matthew and Mark write about only one of them. It would be best to translate each of these passages as it appears in ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
+LUK 24 intro r5qx 0 # Luke 24 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. The women go to Jesus’ tomb and find it empty (24:1-12)
2. Two disciples meet Jesus on a journey to Emmaus (24:13-35)
3. Jesus, risen from the dead, appears to his disciples (24:36-53)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### The loyalty of the women
Many of Luke’s original readers would have thought that women were less important than men. But Luke carefully demonstrates that some women who loved Jesus very much showed him greater loyalty than the twelve disciples did. While the disciples ran away and hid, the women lovingly cared for Jesus’ body, and as a result, they were the first to learn that he had risen from the dead.
### Resurrection
Luke wants his readers to understand that Jesus came alive again in a physical body ([Luke 24:38-43](../24/38.md)).
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “the third day”
This expression occurs three times in this chapter, in [24:7](../24/07.md), [24:21](../24/21.md), and [24:46](../24/46.md). See the explanation of this expression in the note to Luke [18:33](../18/33.md). In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” By that way of reckoning time, since Jesus died on a Friday, when he rose from the dead on a Sunday, that was the “third day.”
### Two men in bright shining robes
Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all write about angels in white clothing speaking with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Matthew and John call them angels, while Mark and Luke call them men, but that is only because the angels appeared in human form. Luke and John write about both angels, while Matthew and Mark write about only one of them. It would be best to translate each of these passages as it appears in ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
LUK 24 1 m682 figs-explicit τῇ…μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 on the first of the week This implicitly means the **first** day of the week. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
LUK 24 1 r62f translate-ordinal τῇ…μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 on the first of the week Here Luke is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean **first**. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
LUK 24 1 m683 figs-idiom ὄρθρου βαθέως 1 deeply at dawn This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “at the first light of dawn” or “as dawn was just beginning to break” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-LUK 24 1 qg7a writing-pronouns ἐπὶ τὸ μνῆμα ἦλθαν 1 they came to the tomb The pronoun **they** refers to the women whom Luke describes in [23:55–56](../23/55.md). Alternate translation: “these women returned to the tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+LUK 24 1 qg7a writing-pronouns ἐπὶ τὸ μνῆμα ἦλθαν 1 they came to the tomb The pronoun **they** refers to the women whom Luke describes in [23:55-56](../23/55.md). Alternate translation: “these women returned to the tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
LUK 24 2 jq9p εὗρον…τὸν λίθον ἀποκεκυλισμένον 1 they found the stone rolled away Alternate translation: “they saw that the stone had been rolled away”
LUK 24 2 l6uk figs-activepassive τὸν λίθον ἀποκεκυλισμένον 1 the stone rolled away If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that someone had rolled away the stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
LUK 24 2 t4mf figs-explicit τὸν λίθον 1 the stone Luke assumes that his readers will know that this was a large, cut, round stone that was big enough to completely block the entrance to the tomb. It had been put in place to seal off the entrance, and it would have required several people to move it. Alternate translation: “the large stone that had been put in place at the entrance to the tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
index 7a7967f12..da2564c59 100644
--- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-JHN front intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Gospel of John
1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1-18)
1. Jesus is baptized, and he chooses twelve disciples (1:19-51)
1. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2-11)
1. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12-19)
- Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1-11)
- Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12-19)
- Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20-36)
- The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37-50)
- Jesus teaches his disciples (13-17)
- Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1-19:15)
- Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16-42)
1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1-29)
1. John says why he wrote his gospel (20:30-31)
1. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)
### What is the Gospel of John about?
The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” (20:31).
John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other gospels.
John wrote much about the signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Gospel of John?
This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the Apostle John was the author.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?
John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?
John often used the words “remain,” “reside”, and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. Also, John spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.
Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” (John 6:56). The UST uses the idea of “will be joined to me, and I will be joined to him.” But translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.
In the passage, “If my words remain in you” (John 15:7), the UST expresses this idea as, “If you live by my message.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?
The following verses found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include these verses, the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to John’s Gospel.
* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord occasionally went down into the pool and stirred the water and whoever went first after the stirring of the water, was made well from the disease they had.” (5:3-4)
* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” (8:59)
The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets ([]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.
* The story of the adulterous woman (7:53–8:11)
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+JHN front intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Gospel of John
1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1-18)
1. Jesus is baptized, and he chooses twelve disciples (1:19-51)
1. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2-11)
1. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12-19)
- Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1-11)
- Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12-19)
- Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20-36)
- The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37-50)
- Jesus teaches his disciples (13-17)
- Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1-19:15)
- Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16-42)
1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1-29)
1. John says why he wrote his gospel (20:30-31)
1. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)
### What is the Gospel of John about?
The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” (20:31).
John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other gospels.
John wrote much about the signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### Who wrote the Gospel of John?
This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the Apostle John was the author.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?
John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?
John often used the words “remain,” “reside”, and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. Also, John spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.
Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” (John 6:56). The UST uses the idea of “will be joined to me, and I will be joined to him.” But translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.
In the passage, “If my words remain in you” (John 15:7), the UST expresses this idea as, “If you live by my message.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.
### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?
The following verses found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include these verses, the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to John’s Gospel.
* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord occasionally went down into the pool and stirred the water and whoever went first after the stirring of the water, was made well from the disease they had.” (5:3-4)
* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” (8:59)
The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets ([]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.
* The story of the adulterous woman (7:53-8:11)
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
JHN 1 intro k29b 0 # John 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:23, which are words from the Old Testament.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “The Word”
John uses the phrase “the Word” to refer to Jesus ([John 1:1, 14](./01.md)). John is saying that God’s most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]])
### Light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### “Children of God”
When people believes in Jesus, they go from being “children of wrath” to “children of God.” They are adopted into the “family of God.”They are adopted into the “family of God.” This is an important image that will be unfolded in the New Testament. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
John uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of the Word to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “In the beginning”
Some languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But “very long ago” is different from “in the beginning,” and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.
### “Son of Man”
Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 1:51](../../jhn/01/51.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JHN 1 1 er9g ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 In the beginning This refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth.
JHN 1 1 z59q ὁ λόγος 1 the Word This refers to Jesus. Translate as “the Word” if possible. If “Word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.”
diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv
index 8f9e8c1c6..e019a77ae 100644
--- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy
1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).
### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?
Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.
### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?
Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?
As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.
### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?
God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”
In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?
For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.
* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy
1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14-26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).
### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?
Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.
This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.
### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?
Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?
As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.
### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?
God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Singular and plural “you”
In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”
In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?
Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.
### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?
For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.
* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Spiritual children
Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Persecution
Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel.
2TI 1 1 p001 translate-names Παῦλος 1 Paul This is the name of a man, the author of the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 1 1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 Paul This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you can use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter”
diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv
index 7980ac32e..a1ff581d9 100644
--- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-JAS front intro exs3 0 # Introduction to James
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of James
1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2–4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5–8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9–11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12-15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16-27)
7. A warning against favoring rich people (2:1-13)
8. Faith and works (2:14-26)
9. The need for self-control in speech (3:1-12)
10. Worldly wisdom and heavenly wisdom contrasted (3:13-18)
11. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1-12)
12. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13-17)
13. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
14. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
15. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
16. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
17. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)
### Who wrote the book of James?
There is wide agreement among biblical scholars that the author of this book was James the half-brother of Jesus, who was a leader in the early church in the city of Jerusalem. He was respected for his wisdom and authority. For example, he had the last word at the Jerusalem Council, an important meeting of the early church, that is described in Acts [15:13–21](../act/15/13.md). In Galatians [2:9](../gal/02/09.md), the apostle Paul calls him a “pillar” of the church, meaning one of its most important leaders. However, even though James was an influential church leader and the half-brother of Jesus, in this letter he introduces himself humbly as “a servant of God and of the Lord Jesus Christ.”
This is not the same man as the apostle James, who was the brother of the apostle John. That James was killed for his faith a few years after Jesus himself was killed and rose from the dead. This letter was written many years after that.
### What kind of writing is the book of James?
The book of James has an opening that is typical of the letters of its time, but it does not have a main body that develops sequentially and logically the way a letter would have. Instead, the book presents a collection of short sayings and reflections on various subjects. (In that way it is similar to the book of Proverbs.) As the outline at the beginning of this introduction shows, the book is made up of many short sections that move around from topic to topic.
James uses many of the devices that speakers used in his time, such as anticipating and answering a question that someone might ask. He also uses many vivid examples drawn from both nature and everyday life. For this reason, many interpreters believe that for the content of this book, James drew on sermons he had preached and on wise advice he had given. He wanted to share all of that wisdom with Christians living in different parts of the Roman Empire to help them face difficult times. It is also possible that James wrote this letter because he was nearing the end of his life and he wanted his wisdom to be preserved and shared after his death.
### To whom was the book of James written?
James wrote this letter to believers in Jesus who had a Jewish background. This is clear from many of the things that he says in the letter. For example, he addresses his readers figuratively as “the twelve tribes” in [1:1](../01/01.md). He speaks of their meeting place as a “synagogue” in [2:2](../02/02.md). He assumes in [2:19](../02/19.md) that they are familiar with the essential Jewish affirmation that “God is one,” and in [2:21](../02/21.md) he calls Abraham “our father.” He calls God by the Hebrew title the Lord of Sabaoth in [5:4](../05/04.md). He assumes that his readers will be familiar from the Hebrew Scriptures with the stories of people such as Job ([5:11](../05/11.md)) and Elijah ([5:17](../05/17.md)). These notes will call attention to the places where James engages his readers in light of their Jewish background.
### What is the book of James about?
In this letter, James writes to believers living all over the Roman Empire who are suffering. He tells them that God is working through their sufferings to help them become more mature Christians. James also writes much in this letter about how believers should live in this world and treat one another. He urges them to treat other people fairly, not to quarrel and fight, and to be compassionate and generous.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “James.” Alternatively, they may choose a different title such as “A Letter from James” or “The Letter James Wrote.” But note that "James" is actually the English form of the author's name. In the letter itself, he calls himself "Jacob," which is the original Hebrew form of his name. So you may want to refer to him in the title of the book by the same name that you will use in your translation for the character of Jacob in the book of Genesis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Did James disagree with Paul about how a person is justified before God?
Paul taught in Romans that Christians are justified by faith and not by works. James seems to teach that Christians are justified by works. This could be confusing. However, a better understanding of what Paul and James each taught shows that they actually agree with one another. Both of them taught that a person needs faith in order to be justified. They both also taught that true faith would lead a person to do good works. Paul and James taught about these things in different ways because they had different audiences who needed to know different things about being justified. James wrote primarily to Jewish Christians, while Paul wrote to communities in which there were many Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How should the translator signal transitions between topics in the book of James?
James moves briskly from one topic to another. Often he does not end his discussion of one topic with a summary and then begin the discussion of the next topic with an introduction. It might be helpful to your readers if you set topics apart by putting blank lines between them. However, your readers would have the same experience of the letter that its original audience did if you allowed the transitions between topics to remain abrupt. Just as happens in the book of Proverbs, James seems to have wanted each new thought to strike his audience with fresh force. So you may also choose not to put any blank lines between topics in your translation.
James often makes the link between topics through key words, for example, “rejoice” in 1:1 and “joy” in 1:2; “lacking” in 1:4 and “lacks” in 1:5; and so forth. If you can find ways to translate these key words similarly in both of their occurrences, this should help your readers appreciate the link and the transition.
### Changes from the present tense to the past tense
In several places where James offers an illustration of a point he has just made, he narrates that illustration in the past tense as if he were telling the story of something that had happened. If this would be confusing for your readers, you could translate these illustrations in the present tense. Notes will identify each of these places and make that suggestion.
### Textual issues in the book of James
See the General Notes to chapter 2 for a discussion of one important textual issue in this book.
-JAS 1 intro pz2q 0 # James 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2–4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5–8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9–11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12-15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16-27)
James begins this letter in [1:1](../01/01.md) by giving his name, identifying the people to whom he is writing, and offering a greeting. That was the way people typically began letters at this time. However, as Part 1 of the Introduction to James explains, the letter does not then develop the way other letters did. Instead, it is a collection of short sayings and reflections.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Testing and temptation
James uses a word in this chapter that can mean both “trial,” as in [1:2](../01/02.md) and [1:12](../01/12.md), and “temptation,” as in [1:13–14](../01/13.md). In both cases the word speaks of the situation of a person who needs to choose between doing something good and doing something evil. The difference between the two senses is important. When ULT translates the word as “trial,” God is testing the person and wants him to do what is good. When ULT translates the word as “temptation,” Satan is tempting the person and wants him to do what is evil.
+JAS front intro exs3 0 # Introduction to James
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of James
1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2-4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5-8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9-11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12-15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16-27)
7. A warning against favoring rich people (2:1-13)
8. Faith and works (2:14-26)
9. The need for self-control in speech (3:1-12)
10. Worldly wisdom and heavenly wisdom contrasted (3:13-18)
11. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1-12)
12. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13-17)
13. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
14. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
15. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
16. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
17. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)
### Who wrote the book of James?
There is wide agreement among biblical scholars that the author of this book was James the half-brother of Jesus, who was a leader in the early church in the city of Jerusalem. He was respected for his wisdom and authority. For example, he had the last word at the Jerusalem Council, an important meeting of the early church, that is described in Acts [15:13-21](../act/15/13.md). In Galatians [2:9](../gal/02/09.md), the apostle Paul calls him a “pillar” of the church, meaning one of its most important leaders. However, even though James was an influential church leader and the half-brother of Jesus, in this letter he introduces himself humbly as “a servant of God and of the Lord Jesus Christ.”
This is not the same man as the apostle James, who was the brother of the apostle John. That James was killed for his faith a few years after Jesus himself was killed and rose from the dead. This letter was written many years after that.
### What kind of writing is the book of James?
The book of James has an opening that is typical of the letters of its time, but it does not have a main body that develops sequentially and logically the way a letter would have. Instead, the book presents a collection of short sayings and reflections on various subjects. (In that way it is similar to the book of Proverbs.) As the outline at the beginning of this introduction shows, the book is made up of many short sections that move around from topic to topic.
James uses many of the devices that speakers used in his time, such as anticipating and answering a question that someone might ask. He also uses many vivid examples drawn from both nature and everyday life. For this reason, many interpreters believe that for the content of this book, James drew on sermons he had preached and on wise advice he had given. He wanted to share all of that wisdom with Christians living in different parts of the Roman Empire to help them face difficult times. It is also possible that James wrote this letter because he was nearing the end of his life and he wanted his wisdom to be preserved and shared after his death.
### To whom was the book of James written?
James wrote this letter to believers in Jesus who had a Jewish background. This is clear from many of the things that he says in the letter. For example, he addresses his readers figuratively as “the twelve tribes” in [1:1](../01/01.md). He speaks of their meeting place as a “synagogue” in [2:2](../02/02.md). He assumes in [2:19](../02/19.md) that they are familiar with the essential Jewish affirmation that “God is one,” and in [2:21](../02/21.md) he calls Abraham “our father.” He calls God by the Hebrew title the Lord of Sabaoth in [5:4](../05/04.md). He assumes that his readers will be familiar from the Hebrew Scriptures with the stories of people such as Job ([5:11](../05/11.md)) and Elijah ([5:17](../05/17.md)). These notes will call attention to the places where James engages his readers in light of their Jewish background.
### What is the book of James about?
In this letter, James writes to believers living all over the Roman Empire who are suffering. He tells them that God is working through their sufferings to help them become more mature Christians. James also writes much in this letter about how believers should live in this world and treat one another. He urges them to treat other people fairly, not to quarrel and fight, and to be compassionate and generous.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “James.” Alternatively, they may choose a different title such as “A Letter from James” or “The Letter James Wrote.” But note that "James" is actually the English form of the author's name. In the letter itself, he calls himself "Jacob," which is the original Hebrew form of his name. So you may want to refer to him in the title of the book by the same name that you will use in your translation for the character of Jacob in the book of Genesis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Did James disagree with Paul about how a person is justified before God?
Paul taught in Romans that Christians are justified by faith and not by works. James seems to teach that Christians are justified by works. This could be confusing. However, a better understanding of what Paul and James each taught shows that they actually agree with one another. Both of them taught that a person needs faith in order to be justified. They both also taught that true faith would lead a person to do good works. Paul and James taught about these things in different ways because they had different audiences who needed to know different things about being justified. James wrote primarily to Jewish Christians, while Paul wrote to communities in which there were many Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### How should the translator signal transitions between topics in the book of James?
James moves briskly from one topic to another. Often he does not end his discussion of one topic with a summary and then begin the discussion of the next topic with an introduction. It might be helpful to your readers if you set topics apart by putting blank lines between them. However, your readers would have the same experience of the letter that its original audience did if you allowed the transitions between topics to remain abrupt. Just as happens in the book of Proverbs, James seems to have wanted each new thought to strike his audience with fresh force. So you may also choose not to put any blank lines between topics in your translation.
James often makes the link between topics through key words, for example, “rejoice” in 1:1 and “joy” in 1:2; “lacking” in 1:4 and “lacks” in 1:5; and so forth. If you can find ways to translate these key words similarly in both of their occurrences, this should help your readers appreciate the link and the transition.
### Changes from the present tense to the past tense
In several places where James offers an illustration of a point he has just made, he narrates that illustration in the past tense as if he were telling the story of something that had happened. If this would be confusing for your readers, you could translate these illustrations in the present tense. Notes will identify each of these places and make that suggestion.
### Textual issues in the book of James
See the General Notes to chapter 2 for a discussion of one important textual issue in this book.
+JAS 1 intro pz2q 0 # James 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2-4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5-8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9-11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12-15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16-27)
James begins this letter in [1:1](../01/01.md) by giving his name, identifying the people to whom he is writing, and offering a greeting. That was the way people typically began letters at this time. However, as Part 1 of the Introduction to James explains, the letter does not then develop the way other letters did. Instead, it is a collection of short sayings and reflections.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Testing and temptation
James uses a word in this chapter that can mean both “trial,” as in [1:2](../01/02.md) and [1:12](../01/12.md), and “temptation,” as in [1:13-14](../01/13.md). In both cases the word speaks of the situation of a person who needs to choose between doing something good and doing something evil. The difference between the two senses is important. When ULT translates the word as “trial,” God is testing the person and wants him to do what is good. When ULT translates the word as “temptation,” Satan is tempting the person and wants him to do what is evil.
JAS 1 1 pkt2 figs-123person Ἰάκωβος 1 James In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, and they would refer to themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, you could also use that if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I, James, am writing this letter” or “From James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JAS 1 1 j000 translate-names Ἰάκωβος 1 James This is the name of a man, the half-brother of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to James. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
JAS 1 1 j001 figs-metonymy ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes James is speaking figuratively of the nation of Israel by association with the fact that it was made up of twelve tribes. Alternate translation: “to the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ JAS 1 11 ng26 figs-metaphor μαρανθήσεται 1 will wither James speaks
JAS 1 11 sdi2 figs-metaphor ἐν ταῖς πορείαις αὐτοῦ 1 in his journeys James speaks figuratively of a **rich** person’s activities as if they were a journey that he was taking. This metaphor implies that he is giving no thought to his coming death and that it will take him by surprise. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JAS 1 12 m13d figs-idiom μακάριος ἀνὴρ ὃς ὑπομένει πειρασμόν 1 Blessed is the man who endures trial **Blessed is** indicates that God is giving favor to someone or that his situation is positive or good. Alternate translation: “The person who endures trial receives God’s favor” or “The person who endures trial is in a positive situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
JAS 1 12 j029 figs-gendernotations ἀνὴρ 1 the man James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-JAS 1 12 vr4a ὑπομένει πειρασμόν 1 endures trial Here, **trial** could mean one of two things. See the discussion of the word in the General Notes to this chapter. James may actually want his readers to hear both senses in this case, as this verse is making a transition from a discussion of testing into a discussion of temptation. (1) The word **trial** could mean the same thing as in [1:2–3](../01/02.md), where it describes the “testing” of “faith.” The reading of UST expresses this interpretation. (2) The word could refer to being tempted, that is, being led by one’s desires to do something wrong, which James discusses in the following verses. Alternate translation: “resists temptation”
+JAS 1 12 vr4a ὑπομένει πειρασμόν 1 endures trial Here, **trial** could mean one of two things. See the discussion of the word in the General Notes to this chapter. James may actually want his readers to hear both senses in this case, as this verse is making a transition from a discussion of testing into a discussion of temptation. (1) The word **trial** could mean the same thing as in [1:2-3](../01/02.md), where it describes the “testing” of “faith.” The reading of UST expresses this interpretation. (2) The word could refer to being tempted, that is, being led by one’s desires to do something wrong, which James discusses in the following verses. Alternate translation: “resists temptation”
JAS 1 12 vta6 δόκιμος γενόμενος 1 becoming approved How you translate this will depend on how you translate **trial** earlier in the sentence. (In your translation, you could also focus on the way that God approves of this person, as UST does.) Alternate translation: (1) “once he has demonstrated his faithfulness” or (2) “once he has demonstrated his obedience”
JAS 1 12 j030 figs-possession λήμψεται τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 he will receive the crown of life James is using the possessive form not to refer to a **crown** that belongs to **life** but to describe **life** as if it were a **crown**. Alternate translation: “he will receive the crown that is life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
JAS 1 12 k3hh figs-metaphor λήμψεται τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 he will receive the crown of life James is using the image of a **crown** figuratively to indicate that God will honor this person. Alternate translation: “God will honor him by giving him life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ JAS 1 26 j079 figs-metaphor μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐ
JAS 1 26 j080 translate-unknown μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue A **bridle** is headgear that is used to control a horse. If your readers would not be familiar with what a **bridle** is, you could use a different illustration that would be familiar to them of a device that is used in your culture to control animals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
JAS 1 26 vxu1 figs-metonymy μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue By association with the way that the **tongue** is used in speech, James is using the term **tongue** figuratively to mean what a person says. Alternate translation: “not controlling what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
JAS 1 26 sex6 figs-synecdoche ἀπατῶν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 deceiving his heart James is figuratively using one part of this hypothetical person, his **heart**, to mean the person himself. Alternate translation: “deceiving himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-JAS 1 26 q83d figs-hyperbole τούτου μάταιος ἡ θρησκεία 1 the religion of that one is worthless James says **worthless** as an overstatement for emphasis. There would conceivably still be some value in the religion of a person even if he did not carefully control what he said. But James wants to emphasize how inconsistent it is to claim to love God but then to say things that hurt and disparage other people. He will develop this point further in [3:9–10](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “his actions are not as pleasing to God as he thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+JAS 1 26 q83d figs-hyperbole τούτου μάταιος ἡ θρησκεία 1 the religion of that one is worthless James says **worthless** as an overstatement for emphasis. There would conceivably still be some value in the religion of a person even if he did not carefully control what he said. But James wants to emphasize how inconsistent it is to claim to love God but then to say things that hurt and disparage other people. He will develop this point further in [3:9-10](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “his actions are not as pleasing to God as he thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
JAS 1 27 j081 figs-metaphor θρησκεία καθαρὰ καὶ ἀμίαντος 1 Pure and undefiled religion James is speaking figuratively of **religion** as if it could be physically **pure** and **undefiled**. Alternate translation: “Religion that is pleasing and acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JAS 1 27 g11k figs-doublet θρησκεία καθαρὰ καὶ ἀμίαντος 1 Pure and undefiled religion The terms **pure** and **undefiled** mean similar things. They both indicate that something is free of contamination. James is using these terms together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Religion that is completely acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
JAS 1 27 skf4 figs-metaphor παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 before God The word **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” another person, and in this case **before** him indicates “where God can see.” Seeing, for its part, represents attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “from God’s perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ JAS 2 5 s38z figs-metaphor πλουσίους ἐν πίστει 1 to be rich in
JAS 2 5 j101 figs-explicit πλουσίους ἐν πίστει 1 to be rich in faith Your language may require you to specify the object of **faith**. Alternate translation: “to have strong faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
JAS 2 5 qii5 figs-metaphor κληρονόμους τῆς βασιλείας ἧς 1 heirs of the kingdom that James speaks figuratively of the people to whom God has promised the kingdom as if they were going to inherit wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “participants in the kingdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JAS 2 5 j102 figs-abstractnouns κληρονόμους τῆς βασιλείας ἧς 1 to be heirs of the kingdom that If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “to enjoy advantages when God rules, as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-JAS 2 6 vr53 ἠτιμάσατε τὸν πτωχόν 1 you have dishonored the poor What James means by this is clear from the example he gives in [2:2–3](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “you have treated people who are poor much worse than you have treated people who are rich”
+JAS 2 6 vr53 ἠτιμάσατε τὸν πτωχόν 1 you have dishonored the poor What James means by this is clear from the example he gives in [2:2-3](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “you have treated people who are poor much worse than you have treated people who are rich”
JAS 2 6 j103 figs-nominaladj τὸν πτωχόν 1 the poor James is using the adjective **poor** as a noun to refer to a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
JAS 2 6 j104 writing-pronouns οὐχ οἱ πλούσιοι καταδυναστεύουσιν ὑμῶν, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἕλκουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς κριτήρια 1 Do not the rich overpower you and themselves drag you into court The word that is translated **themselves** here is the same word that is translated **they** in the next verse. It is effectively the subject of a new independent clause, so you could translate this as two sentences. Alternate translation: “Do not the rich overpower you? Do they not drag you into court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
JAS 2 6 l2lu figs-rquestion οὐχ οἱ πλούσιοι καταδυναστεύουσιν ὑμῶν, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἕλκουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς κριτήρια? 1 Do not the rich overpower you and themselves drag you into court? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is the rich who overpower you and drag you into court themselves!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ JAS 2 17 j138 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις, ἐὰν μὴ ἔχῃ ἔρ
JAS 2 18 j139 figs-quotations ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις, κἀγὼ ἔργα ἔχω 1 But someone will say, “You have faith and I have works.” See the discussion of this sentence in the General Notes to this chapter. It may be helpful to turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation to make it clearer that the **you** who is being addressed is the same “one of you” as in [2:16](../02/16.md) and that when James says **I**, he is referring to himself. Alternate translation: “But someone may tell you that you have faith and I have works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
JAS 2 18 j140 figs-explicit ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις, κἀγὼ ἔργα ἔχω 1 But someone will say, “You have faith, and I have works.” See the discussion of this sentence in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate more explicitly what this statement means. (UST explains the implications even further than is suggested here.) Alternate translation: “But someone may try to reassure you that you nevertheless have faith, while I, James, have works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
JAS 2 18 al63 figs-hypo ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις 1 But someone will say James is using a hypothetical situation to teach. This expression introduces the condition of the hypothetical situation. (As Part 1 of the General Introduction to James explains, in the style of speakers of this time, James is anticipating an objection that someone might make and saying how he would respond to it.) Alternate translation: “But suppose someone said to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-JAS 2 18 j141 figs-yousingular σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις 1 you have faith Here, **you** is singular because James is illustrating how someone might address one individual. James himself then addresses that same individual in the rest of this verse and in verses [19–22](../02/19.md). So if your language marks the distinction, use the singular form of “you” in your translation from here through verse 22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+JAS 2 18 j141 figs-yousingular σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις 1 you have faith Here, **you** is singular because James is illustrating how someone might address one individual. James himself then addresses that same individual in the rest of this verse and in verses [19-22](../02/19.md). So if your language marks the distinction, use the singular form of “you” in your translation from here through verse 22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
JAS 2 18 j142 figs-quotations δεῖξόν μοι τὴν πίστιν σου χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων, κἀγώ σοι δείξω ἐκ τῶν ἔργων μου τὴν πίστιν 1 Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works It may be helpful to make this sentence a direct quotation after an introduction to show that it is what James would say in response to the hypothetical objection. Alternate translation: “Then I would say to you, ‘Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
JAS 2 18 j143 figs-hypo δεῖξόν μοι τὴν πίστιν σου χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων, κἀγώ σοι δείξω ἐκ τῶν ἔργων μου τὴν πίστιν 1 Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works This is the result of the hypothetical situation that James has been describing. Alternate translation: “Then I would say to you, ‘Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
JAS 2 18 j144 figs-imperative δεῖξόν μοι τὴν πίστιν σου χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων 1 Show me your faith without works James is using the imperative **show me** to challenge the hypothetical “you” and make him realize that he really cannot do what James is telling him to do. Alternate translation: “You cannot show me your faith without works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
@@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ JAS 4 1 vpe2 figs-personification τῶν ἡδονῶν ὑμῶν, τῶν σ
JAS 4 2 j243 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐπιθυμεῖτε καὶ οὐκ ἔχετε; φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε, καὶ οὐ δύνασθε ἐπιτυχεῖν 1 You covet, and you do not have. You kill and envy, and you are not able to obtain In both of these sentences, James is using the word translated **and** to introduce a contrast between the first and second clauses. Alternate translation: “You covet, but you do not have. You kill and envy, but you are not able to obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
JAS 4 2 j244 ἐπιθυμεῖτε καὶ οὐκ ἔχετε; φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε, καὶ οὐ δύνασθε ἐπιτυχεῖν 1 You covet, and you do not have. You kill and envy, and you are not able to obtain Your language may require you to specify the objects of **have** and **obtain**. Alternate translation: “You covet, but you do not have what you covet. You kill and envy, but you are not able to obtain the things that you envy”
JAS 4 2 j245 figs-parallelism ἐπιθυμεῖτε καὶ οὐκ ἔχετε; φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε, καὶ οὐ δύνασθε ἐπιτυχεῖν 1 You covet, and you do not have. You kill and envy, and you are not able to obtain These two sentences mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “You desperately want things that other people have, but you cannot get them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-JAS 4 2 khh9 figs-metaphor φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε 1 You kill and envy James probably does not mean the word **kill** literally. Rather, this could mean: (1) James may be using the word in a figurative and spiritual sense to mean “hate.” This usage would reflect the teaching of Jesus and the apostles. Jesus said that the meaning of the commandment “do not kill” also applied to being angry with others and insulting them (Matthew [5:21–22](../mat/05/21.md)). The apostle John wrote that “everyone who hates his brother is a murderer” (1 John [3:15](../1jn/03/15.md)). Alternate translation: “You hate and envy” (2) James could be describing someone wanting something so badly that he would almost kill to get it. Alternate translation: “You envy almost to the point of murder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JAS 4 2 khh9 figs-metaphor φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε 1 You kill and envy James probably does not mean the word **kill** literally. Rather, this could mean: (1) James may be using the word in a figurative and spiritual sense to mean “hate.” This usage would reflect the teaching of Jesus and the apostles. Jesus said that the meaning of the commandment “do not kill” also applied to being angry with others and insulting them (Matthew [5:21-22](../mat/05/21.md)). The apostle John wrote that “everyone who hates his brother is a murderer” (1 John [3:15](../1jn/03/15.md)). Alternate translation: “You hate and envy” (2) James could be describing someone wanting something so badly that he would almost kill to get it. Alternate translation: “You envy almost to the point of murder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JAS 4 2 j246 figs-hendiadys φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε 1 You kill and envy James is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **kill** describes how his readers **envy** what others have. Alternate translation: (1) “you envy hatefully” or (2) “you envy murderously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
JAS 4 2 j247 figs-metaphor μάχεσθε καὶ πολεμεῖτε 1 You battle and war As in [4:1](../04/01.md), James is using the terms **battle** and **war** figuratively. Alternate translation: “You engage in disputes and conflicts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JAS 4 2 v9m8 figs-doublet μάχεσθε καὶ πολεμεῖτε 1 You battle and war The words **battle** and **war** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “You have continual conflicts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ JAS 4 15 j289 figs-exclusive καὶ ζήσομεν καὶ ποιήσομεν 1
JAS 4 15 j290 figs-idiom τοῦτο ἢ ἐκεῖνο 1 this or that This is an idiom. No specific actions are intended. You language may have a comparable idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “such-and-such” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
JAS 4 16 j291 figs-abstractnouns καυχᾶσθε ἐν ταῖς ἀλαζονίαις ὑμῶν. πᾶσα καύχησις τοιαύτη πονηρά ἐστιν 1 you are boasting in your pretensions. All such boasting is evil If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **pretensions** and **boasting** (the second occurrence of the word in ULT) with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “you are boasting about what you presume you will be able to do. It is always wrong to boast like that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
JAS 4 17 q84z εἰδότι οὖν καλὸν ποιεῖν, καὶ μὴ ποιοῦντι, ἁμαρτία αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Therefore to the one having known to do good and not doing it, to him it is sin James is using the word **therefore** to describe a further inference rather than a conclusion. He is saying that if it is wrong to plan to do things without knowing whether God wants you to do them, then it is also wrong not to do things that you do know God wants. Alternate translation: “From this we can also recognize that if someone does know what God wants him to do but he does not do it, then he is also sinning”
-JAS 5 intro ud8q 0 ## James 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
2. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
3. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
4. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
5. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Living for eternity
The first section of this chapter, which is a warning to rich people, contrasts living for things of this world, which will not last, with living for things that will last for eternity. The second section of the chapter is related to that first section. In it, James stresses that it is important to live with the expectation that Jesus will return soon. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])
### Oaths
In [5:12](../05/12.md), James tells his readers not to swear any oaths. However, biblical scholars are divided over whether James intends to teach literally that all oaths are wrong. Some scholars believe that some oaths are permissible and that James is emphasizing how Christians should have integrity in what they say.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Elijah
The illustration that James gives from the life of the prophet Elijah in [5:17–18](../05/17.md) may be difficult for your readers to appreciate if the books of 1 and 2 Kings have not yet been translated. See the first note to 5:17 for a suggestion about how to help your readers understand this illustration better.
+JAS 5 intro ud8q 0 ## James 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
2. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
3. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
4. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
5. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Living for eternity
The first section of this chapter, which is a warning to rich people, contrasts living for things of this world, which will not last, with living for things that will last for eternity. The second section of the chapter is related to that first section. In it, James stresses that it is important to live with the expectation that Jesus will return soon. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])
### Oaths
In [5:12](../05/12.md), James tells his readers not to swear any oaths. However, biblical scholars are divided over whether James intends to teach literally that all oaths are wrong. Some scholars believe that some oaths are permissible and that James is emphasizing how Christians should have integrity in what they say.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Elijah
The illustration that James gives from the life of the prophet Elijah in [5:17-18](../05/17.md) may be difficult for your readers to appreciate if the books of 1 and 2 Kings have not yet been translated. See the first note to 5:17 for a suggestion about how to help your readers understand this illustration better.
JAS 5 1 j292 figs-idiom ἄγε νῦν 1 Come now This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [4:13](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
JAS 5 1 j293 οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is addressing these people in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. (If you use the word “you,” it would be plural, since James is addressing a group of people.) Alternate translation: “you who are rich”
JAS 5 1 j294 figs-nominaladj οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is using the adjective **rich** as a noun to refer to a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “you people who are rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ JAS 5 3 j301 figs-explicit ὁ ἰὸς αὐτῶν εἰς μαρτύριον
JAS 5 3 w3aj figs-metonymy φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ 1 it will eat your flesh James is using the word **flesh** to mean the human body, by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “it will eat your bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
JAS 5 3 j6fe figs-metaphor φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ 1 it will eat your flesh James is saying figuratively that this rust will corrode and consume the owners of the gold and silver that it is also corroding. Alternate translation: “it will consume you” or “it will ruin you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JAS 5 3 i37x figs-simile ὡς πῦρ 1 like fire It may be helpful to express the meaning of this simile more fully. Alternate translation: “just as fire consumes everything that it burns” or “just as fire ruins everything that it burns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-JAS 5 3 j302 figs-explicit ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 You have stored up in the last days If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what these rich people have **stored up** and why it was wrong for them to do that. This could mean: (1) James could be saying that they have accumulated riches in the **last days**, that is, in the time just before Jesus returns. That would be wrong because once Jesus returns, earthly riches will no longer have any value. Instead of trying to get more and more wealth, these people should have been helping others with what they had. Alternate translation: “Instead of helping others, you have wrongly stored up wealth at a time when earthly riches are about to lose all of their value” (2) James could be saying that by their wrongdoing, such as he describes in [5:4–6](../05/04.md), these rich people have **stored up** punishment for themselves. Alternate translation: “God is just about to punish wrongdoers, and you have given God many reasons to punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JAS 5 3 j302 figs-explicit ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 You have stored up in the last days If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what these rich people have **stored up** and why it was wrong for them to do that. This could mean: (1) James could be saying that they have accumulated riches in the **last days**, that is, in the time just before Jesus returns. That would be wrong because once Jesus returns, earthly riches will no longer have any value. Instead of trying to get more and more wealth, these people should have been helping others with what they had. Alternate translation: “Instead of helping others, you have wrongly stored up wealth at a time when earthly riches are about to lose all of their value” (2) James could be saying that by their wrongdoing, such as he describes in [5:4-6](../05/04.md), these rich people have **stored up** punishment for themselves. Alternate translation: “God is just about to punish wrongdoers, and you have given God many reasons to punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
JAS 5 3 j303 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 You have stored up in the last days If the first interpretation of this statement in the note just above is correct, then James is giving the reason for the results that he describes in the previous verse and in the earlier part of this verse. If you created a verse bridge as described in the first note to [5:2](../05/02.md), you could put this reason before the result by placing this statement first in that bridge. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
JAS 5 3 np1u figs-idiom ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 the last days This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the time just before Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
JAS 5 4 j304 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ὁ μισθὸς τῶν ἐργατῶν 1 Behold, the pay of the workers The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. It may be helpful to express its meaning as a separate sentence here. Alternate translation: “Consider this! The pay of the workers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ JAS 5 6 u5c5 figs-synecdoche κατεδικάσατε, ἐφονεύσατε τ
JAS 5 6 j311 figs-nominaladj τὸν δίκαιον 1 the righteous James is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun to refer to a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the righteous person” or “the innocent person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
JAS 5 6 lq6p figs-genericnoun τὸν δίκαιον 1 the righteous The expression **the righteous** refers to righteous people in general, not to one specific person. Alternate translation: “righteous people” or “innocent people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
JAS 5 6 z7w1 figs-explicit οὐκ ἀντιτάσσεται ὑμῖν 1 He does not resist you This could mean: (1) It could mean implicitly that the innocent people are not able to resist what the rich people are doing. Alternate translation: “He is not able to resist you” (2) It could mean that the innocent people wanted a peaceful resolution and were not fighting back. Alternate translation: “You have done this even though the innocent person wanted a peaceful resolution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-JAS 5 6 j312 figs-explicit οὐκ ἀντιτάσσεται ὑμῖν 1 He does not resist you In light of everything that James says in [5:1–6](../05/01.md), the implications are that even though these innocent people are not able to defend themselves, God will defend them by judging and punishing these rich people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JAS 5 6 j312 figs-explicit οὐκ ἀντιτάσσεται ὑμῖν 1 He does not resist you In light of everything that James says in [5:1-6](../05/01.md), the implications are that even though these innocent people are not able to defend themselves, God will defend them by judging and punishing these rich people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
JAS 5 7 a4sv grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore James uses **Therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has just said about rich people. He is referring specifically to what he said about God’s judgment being imminent. Alternate translation: “Because you know that God will soon judge the people who are oppressing you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
JAS 5 7 j313 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JAS 5 7 wgk4 ἕως τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου 1 until the coming of the Lord James is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “until Jesus returns” or “until the Lord Jesus returns”
diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv
index c352a8189..08e22d5b6 100644
--- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of 1 John
This is a letter that the apostle John wrote to challenge and correct false teachings that were leading followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and live in wrong ways. At that time, the letter form had distinct opening and closing sections. The main body of the letter came in between.
1. Opening of Letter (1:1-4)
2. Main Body of Letter (1:5–5:12)
* Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–2:17)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
* Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–3:10)
* Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11–18)
* Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19–24)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
* Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)
1. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)
### Who wrote the book of 1 John?
The author of this letter does not give his name. However, since early Christian times, the church has widely considered the apostle John to be the author. He wrote the Gospel of John, and there are many similarities between the content of that book and this letter. If John did write this letter, he probably did so near the end of his life.
### To whom was the book of 1 John written?
The author wrote this letter to people whom he addresses as “beloved” and, figuratively, as “my little children.” This probably means believers in various churches located in the area where John was then living.
### What is the book of 1 John about?
False teachers were encouraging followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and to live in wrong ways. John wanted to challenge and correct those false teachings so that the people who received his letter would continue to believe the truth they had been taught and live in right ways. The false teachers were saying that these people were not saved; John wanted to assure them that they were saved.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 John” or “First John.” They may also choose a different title, such as “The First Letter from John” or “The First Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Who were the people whom John spoke against?
The false teachers John was challenging seem to have held beliefs similar to what would later become known as Gnosticism. Those false teachers believed that the physical world was evil. They thought that God would not become human, since they considered the physical body to be evil, so they denied that Jesus was God come to earth in human form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### “sin”
In chapter 1, John says that we should not deny that we have sinned. Rather, if we confess our sin, God will forgive us. In chapter 2, John says that he is writing this letter so that the recipients will not sin, but he adds that if they do sin, Jesus will advocate on their behalf. But in chapter 3, John says that everyone who has been begotten from God and who remains in God does not commit sin and is not able to sin. And in chapter 5, John says that we should not pray for people who are sinning certain ways, although we should pray for people who are sinning in other ways. This may seem confusing and contradictory.
However, the explanation is that the people whose teachings John was writing to challenge and correct were saying that it did not matter what people did in their bodies. This was because they thought physical matter was evil, and so they thought God did not care about it. In effect, they were saying that there was no such thing as sin. So John needed to say, in chapter 1, that sin is real and that everyone has sinned. Some of the believers may have been deceived by the false teaching and committed sins, so John also needed to reassure them that if they repented and confessed their sins, God would forgive them. John says similar things in chapter 2. Then in chapter 3 he explains that the new nature that believers have as children of God is one that does not want to sin and that does not enjoy sinning. So they should recognize that those who excuse or condone sin are not truly children of God, and that as children of God themselves, they can become more and more obedient and free from sin. Finally, in chapter 5, John warns that if a person sins wantonly and continually, this likely means that they have rejected Jesus and are not influenced by the Holy Spirit. He says that in that case, it may not be effective to pray for them. But he then encourages his readers that if a person sins occasionally but feels remorse, he is influenced by the Spirit, and so the prayers of other believers will help him repent and live in a right way again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])
### “remain”
In this letter, John often uses the word “remain” (which could also be translated as “reside” or “abide”) as a spatial metaphor. John speaks of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if the word of Jesus “remained” in the believer. He speaks of a person being spiritually joined to someone else as if that person “remained” in the other person: He writes that Christians “remain” in Christ and in God, and he says that the Father “remains” in the Son, the Son “remains” in the Father, the Son “remains” in believers, and the Holy Spirit “remains” in believers.
Translators may find it difficult to represent these ideas in their own languages if they try to use exactly the same words and expressions each time. For example, in [2:6](../02/06.md), when John speaks of a believer “remaining” in God, he intends to express the idea of that believer being spiritually unified with God. Accordingly, UST speaks of the believer being “in union with God.” To give another example, for the statement in [2:13](../02/13.md) that “the word of God remains in you,” UST says, “you continue to obey what God commands.” This shows how other expressions can be found that accurately communicate the various ideas that John is expressing through the term “remain.”
### “appear”
In several places in this letter, John uses a term that ULT usually translates as “appear.” This is actually a passive verbal form in Greek, but as is often the case with such forms in that language, it can have an active meaning. When it has an active meaning, it is important to recognize that it does not simply mean “seemed to be there,” as the word “appeared” might suggest. Rather, it means “was there.” This is illustrated well by the use of the term in another New Testament book, 2 Corinthians, in which Paul writes in [5:10](../2co/05/10.md) that “we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ.” Clearly this does not mean that we must only seem to be present there. Rather, we must actually be there.
Throughout the epistle, it is a subtle matter of interpretation to decide whether John is using the term “appear” in an active sense or in a passive sense. For example, in [1:2](../01/02.md), John applies the term twice to the “Word of life,” that is, to Jesus. But it is not clear whether he is saying that Jesus himself “appeared,” that is, he came to earth, or that he “was made apparent” (made visible), with the emphasis on the idea that God revealed Jesus to the world and in the process revealed himself to the world through Jesus. At each place where John uses this term, notes will call attention to it and discuss what it likely means in that context.
### “the world”
John also uses the term “world” in a variety of senses in this letter. It can mean the earth, something material, the people who live in the world, the people who do not honor God, or the values of the people who do not honor God. Notes will address the meaning of the term “world” in each instance where John uses it.
### “to know”
The verb “to know” is used in two different ways in this letter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Sometimes John uses it in two different senses in the same sentence, as in 2:3, “in this we know that we have known him.” Your languages may have different words for these different meanings, and it would be appropriate to use them in your translation.
### Major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 John
When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts the readings that scholars consider to be most accurate in its text, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1JN 1 intro ab9v 0 # 1 John 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Opening of the letter (1:1-4)
2. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–10, continues through 2:17)
## Important translation issues in this chapter
Like many Greek compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes this letter begins with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the middle of [1:3](../01/03.md). The parts of this sentence are not in the order that is customary in many languages. The direct object comes first, and it is very long, made up of many different clauses. The subject and verb do not come until near the end. And in the middle, there is a long digression. So it will be a challenge to translate.
One approach that might work well in your language would be to create a verse bridge that includes all of 1:1–3. You could break up this long sentence into several smaller sentences, repeating the subject and verb for clarity. This would allow you to present the parts of the sentence in an order that might be more customary in your language and that your readers might understand better. For example:
“So that you will have fellowship with us, we are declaring to you what we have seen and heard. We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched. It has to do with the Word of life. Indeed, the life appeared, and we have seen it, and we are testifying to it. Yes, we are announcing to you the eternal life that was with the Father and that appeared to us.”
If you take this approach, another way to translate the second sentence would be, “We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, what we have heard, what we have seen with our eyes, what we have looked at and our hands have touched.”
Another approach that could also work well, and which would not require a verse bridge, would be to leave the phrases in their present order, but to divide the sentence into three parts at the verse divisions. If you do that, you could also put your translation of the phrase “regarding the Word of life” at the beginning rather than the end of [1:1](../01/01.md) and present it as a topical introduction to the letter. Otherwise, your readers might not get the sense that this is a letter until they reached [1:4](../01/04.md), where John formally states his purpose for writing.
The notes to [1:1–4](../01/01.md) provide further specific suggestions for how to translate this long opening sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
In [1:4](../01/04.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “so that our joy may be fulfilled.” ULT follows that reading. However, some other ancient manuscripts read “your joy” instead of “our joy.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1JN 1 1 j363 writing-pronouns ὃ ἦν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς, ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν, ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα, καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν 1 What was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter for how to translate the long sentence in [1:1–3](../01/01.md). If you follow the suggestion to translate the phrase “regarding the Word of life” as a topical introduction to this letter, you will already have indicated that the four clauses in this verse refer to a person, Jesus. You could therefore introduce them with the personal pronouns “who” and “whom.” Alternate translation: “He is the one who has existed from all eternity, whom we heard speak, whom we saw with our own eyes, and whom we looked at and touched with our own hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of 1 John
This is a letter that the apostle John wrote to challenge and correct false teachings that were leading followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and live in wrong ways. At that time, the letter form had distinct opening and closing sections. The main body of the letter came in between.
1. Opening of Letter (1:1-4)
2. Main Body of Letter (1:5-5:12)
* Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5-2:17)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18-2:27)
* Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28-3:10)
* Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11-18)
* Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19-24)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1-6)
* Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7-21)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1-12)
1. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)
### Who wrote the book of 1 John?
The author of this letter does not give his name. However, since early Christian times, the church has widely considered the apostle John to be the author. He wrote the Gospel of John, and there are many similarities between the content of that book and this letter. If John did write this letter, he probably did so near the end of his life.
### To whom was the book of 1 John written?
The author wrote this letter to people whom he addresses as “beloved” and, figuratively, as “my little children.” This probably means believers in various churches located in the area where John was then living.
### What is the book of 1 John about?
False teachers were encouraging followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and to live in wrong ways. John wanted to challenge and correct those false teachings so that the people who received his letter would continue to believe the truth they had been taught and live in right ways. The false teachers were saying that these people were not saved; John wanted to assure them that they were saved.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 John” or “First John.” They may also choose a different title, such as “The First Letter from John” or “The First Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Who were the people whom John spoke against?
The false teachers John was challenging seem to have held beliefs similar to what would later become known as Gnosticism. Those false teachers believed that the physical world was evil. They thought that God would not become human, since they considered the physical body to be evil, so they denied that Jesus was God come to earth in human form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### “sin”
In chapter 1, John says that we should not deny that we have sinned. Rather, if we confess our sin, God will forgive us. In chapter 2, John says that he is writing this letter so that the recipients will not sin, but he adds that if they do sin, Jesus will advocate on their behalf. But in chapter 3, John says that everyone who has been begotten from God and who remains in God does not commit sin and is not able to sin. And in chapter 5, John says that we should not pray for people who are sinning certain ways, although we should pray for people who are sinning in other ways. This may seem confusing and contradictory.
However, the explanation is that the people whose teachings John was writing to challenge and correct were saying that it did not matter what people did in their bodies. This was because they thought physical matter was evil, and so they thought God did not care about it. In effect, they were saying that there was no such thing as sin. So John needed to say, in chapter 1, that sin is real and that everyone has sinned. Some of the believers may have been deceived by the false teaching and committed sins, so John also needed to reassure them that if they repented and confessed their sins, God would forgive them. John says similar things in chapter 2. Then in chapter 3 he explains that the new nature that believers have as children of God is one that does not want to sin and that does not enjoy sinning. So they should recognize that those who excuse or condone sin are not truly children of God, and that as children of God themselves, they can become more and more obedient and free from sin. Finally, in chapter 5, John warns that if a person sins wantonly and continually, this likely means that they have rejected Jesus and are not influenced by the Holy Spirit. He says that in that case, it may not be effective to pray for them. But he then encourages his readers that if a person sins occasionally but feels remorse, he is influenced by the Spirit, and so the prayers of other believers will help him repent and live in a right way again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])
### “remain”
In this letter, John often uses the word “remain” (which could also be translated as “reside” or “abide”) as a spatial metaphor. John speaks of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if the word of Jesus “remained” in the believer. He speaks of a person being spiritually joined to someone else as if that person “remained” in the other person: He writes that Christians “remain” in Christ and in God, and he says that the Father “remains” in the Son, the Son “remains” in the Father, the Son “remains” in believers, and the Holy Spirit “remains” in believers.
Translators may find it difficult to represent these ideas in their own languages if they try to use exactly the same words and expressions each time. For example, in [2:6](../02/06.md), when John speaks of a believer “remaining” in God, he intends to express the idea of that believer being spiritually unified with God. Accordingly, UST speaks of the believer being “in union with God.” To give another example, for the statement in [2:13](../02/13.md) that “the word of God remains in you,” UST says, “you continue to obey what God commands.” This shows how other expressions can be found that accurately communicate the various ideas that John is expressing through the term “remain.”
### “appear”
In several places in this letter, John uses a term that ULT usually translates as “appear.” This is actually a passive verbal form in Greek, but as is often the case with such forms in that language, it can have an active meaning. When it has an active meaning, it is important to recognize that it does not simply mean “seemed to be there,” as the word “appeared” might suggest. Rather, it means “was there.” This is illustrated well by the use of the term in another New Testament book, 2 Corinthians, in which Paul writes in [5:10](../2co/05/10.md) that “we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ.” Clearly this does not mean that we must only seem to be present there. Rather, we must actually be there.
Throughout the epistle, it is a subtle matter of interpretation to decide whether John is using the term “appear” in an active sense or in a passive sense. For example, in [1:2](../01/02.md), John applies the term twice to the “Word of life,” that is, to Jesus. But it is not clear whether he is saying that Jesus himself “appeared,” that is, he came to earth, or that he “was made apparent” (made visible), with the emphasis on the idea that God revealed Jesus to the world and in the process revealed himself to the world through Jesus. At each place where John uses this term, notes will call attention to it and discuss what it likely means in that context.
### “the world”
John also uses the term “world” in a variety of senses in this letter. It can mean the earth, something material, the people who live in the world, the people who do not honor God, or the values of the people who do not honor God. Notes will address the meaning of the term “world” in each instance where John uses it.
### “to know”
The verb “to know” is used in two different ways in this letter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Sometimes John uses it in two different senses in the same sentence, as in 2:3, “in this we know that we have known him.” Your languages may have different words for these different meanings, and it would be appropriate to use them in your translation.
### Major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 John
When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts the readings that scholars consider to be most accurate in its text, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1JN 1 intro ab9v 0 # 1 John 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Opening of the letter (1:1-4)
2. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5-10, continues through 2:17)
## Important translation issues in this chapter
Like many Greek compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes this letter begins with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the middle of [1:3](../01/03.md). The parts of this sentence are not in the order that is customary in many languages. The direct object comes first, and it is very long, made up of many different clauses. The subject and verb do not come until near the end. And in the middle, there is a long digression. So it will be a challenge to translate.
One approach that might work well in your language would be to create a verse bridge that includes all of 1:1-3. You could break up this long sentence into several smaller sentences, repeating the subject and verb for clarity. This would allow you to present the parts of the sentence in an order that might be more customary in your language and that your readers might understand better. For example:
“So that you will have fellowship with us, we are declaring to you what we have seen and heard. We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched. It has to do with the Word of life. Indeed, the life appeared, and we have seen it, and we are testifying to it. Yes, we are announcing to you the eternal life that was with the Father and that appeared to us.”
If you take this approach, another way to translate the second sentence would be, “We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, what we have heard, what we have seen with our eyes, what we have looked at and our hands have touched.”
Another approach that could also work well, and which would not require a verse bridge, would be to leave the phrases in their present order, but to divide the sentence into three parts at the verse divisions. If you do that, you could also put your translation of the phrase “regarding the Word of life” at the beginning rather than the end of [1:1](../01/01.md) and present it as a topical introduction to the letter. Otherwise, your readers might not get the sense that this is a letter until they reached [1:4](../01/04.md), where John formally states his purpose for writing.
The notes to [1:1-4](../01/01.md) provide further specific suggestions for how to translate this long opening sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
In [1:4](../01/04.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “so that our joy may be fulfilled.” ULT follows that reading. However, some other ancient manuscripts read “your joy” instead of “our joy.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1JN 1 1 j363 writing-pronouns ὃ ἦν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς, ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν, ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα, καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν 1 What was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter for how to translate the long sentence in [1:1-3](../01/01.md). If you follow the suggestion to translate the phrase “regarding the Word of life” as a topical introduction to this letter, you will already have indicated that the four clauses in this verse refer to a person, Jesus. You could therefore introduce them with the personal pronouns “who” and “whom.” Alternate translation: “He is the one who has existed from all eternity, whom we heard speak, whom we saw with our own eyes, and whom we looked at and touched with our own hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1JN 1 1 j364 figs-idiom ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to the eternal existence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “from all eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1JN 1 1 jd7p figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν…ἑωράκαμεν…ἡμῶν…ἐθεασάμεθα…ἡμῶν 1 we have heard … we have seen … our … we have looked at … our In most cases in this letter, the first-person plural pronouns are inclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, use the inclusive form in your translation. John is speaking of what both he and the recipients know, or of things that are true of both him and the recipients. However, in a few cases, the first-person pronouns are exclusive, since John is telling the recipients what he and his fellow apostles saw and heard from Jesus. These notes will identify all such places, and in them you should use the exclusive forms, if your language marks that distinction. Here the pronouns **we** and **our** are exclusive, since John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1JN 1 1 ej5x figs-explicit ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν 1 which we have heard The implication is that what John and the other eyewitnesses **heard** was Jesus speaking. Alternate translation: “whom we heard speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1JN 1 10 hii2 figs-explicit ψεύστην ποιοῦμεν αὐτὸν 1 we make him a liar Be sure that it is clear in your translation that God would not actually be a **liar** in this case. Rather, a person who claimed to be without sin would be calling God a liar, since God has said that everyone is a sinner. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that is the same as calling God a liar, because God has said that we have all sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1JN 1 10 j042 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 his word is not in us John is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what God has said by using words. Alternate translation: “we do not believe what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1JN 1 10 m3p1 figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 his word is not in us As he did about the “truth” in [1:8](../01/08.md), John is speaking figuratively of God’s **word** as if it were an object that could be inside believers. Alternate translation: “we do not believe what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN 2 intro zjj9 0 # 1 John 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (2:1–17, continuing from 1:5)
2. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
3. Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–29, continues through 3:10)
In order to show that John is writing something like poetry in in [2:12–14](../02/12.md), some translations set the statements in those verses farther to the right than the rest of the text, and they begin a new line at the start of each statement.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Antichrist
In [2:18](../02/18.md) and [2:22](../02/22.md), John writes both about a specific person called the Antichrist and about many people who will be “antichrists.” The word “antichrist” means “opposed to Christ.” The Antichrist is a person who will come just before the return of Jesus and imitate Jesus’ work, but he will do that for evil purposes. Before that person comes, there will be many other people who work against Christ. They too are called “antichrists,” but as a description rather than as a name. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
In [2:20](../02/20.md), some ancient manuscripts read “you all know,” and that is the reading that ULT follows. However, other ancient manuscripts read “you know all things.” It seems more likely, based on everything else in the letter, that “you all know” is the correct original reading, since John is countering the claim of false teachers to know more than other believers. The reading “you know all things” seems to have arisen because copyists felt a need to have an object for the verb “know.” Nevertheless, if a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1JN 2 intro zjj9 0 # 1 John 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (2:1-17, continuing from 1:5)
2. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18-2:27)
3. Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28-29, continues through 3:10)
In order to show that John is writing something like poetry in in [2:12-14](../02/12.md), some translations set the statements in those verses farther to the right than the rest of the text, and they begin a new line at the start of each statement.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Antichrist
In [2:18](../02/18.md) and [2:22](../02/22.md), John writes both about a specific person called the Antichrist and about many people who will be “antichrists.” The word “antichrist” means “opposed to Christ.” The Antichrist is a person who will come just before the return of Jesus and imitate Jesus’ work, but he will do that for evil purposes. Before that person comes, there will be many other people who work against Christ. They too are called “antichrists,” but as a description rather than as a name. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
In [2:20](../02/20.md), some ancient manuscripts read “you all know,” and that is the reading that ULT follows. However, other ancient manuscripts read “you know all things.” It seems more likely, based on everything else in the letter, that “you all know” is the correct original reading, since John is countering the claim of false teachers to know more than other believers. The reading “you know all things” seems to have arisen because copyists felt a need to have an object for the verb “know.” Nevertheless, if a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1JN 2 1 j043 τεκνία μου 1 My little children Here and in several other places in the book, John uses the diminutive form of the word **children** as an affectionate form of address. Alternate translation: “My dear children”
1JN 2 1 v57g figs-metaphor τεκνία μου 1 My little children John is also using the word **children** figuratively to describe the believers to whom he is writing. They are under his spiritual care, and so he regards them as if they were his own children. You could translate this in a non-figurative way, or you could represent the metaphor as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “You dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 2 1 p49e ταῦτα γράφω 1 I am writing these things Alternate translation: “I am writing this letter”
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1JN 2 11 j080 grammar-connect-logic-result οὐκ οἶδεν ποῦ ὑπάγει, ὅτι ἡ σκοτία ἐτύφλωσεν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 he does not know where he is going, because the darkness has blinded his eyes If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because the darkness has blinded his eyes, he does not know where he is going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1JN 2 11 y5cs figs-metaphor οὐκ οἶδεν ποῦ ὑπάγει 1 he does not know where he is going This is a continuation of the metaphor of walking as a figurative description of how a person lives and behaves. Alternate translation: “he does not know the right way to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 2 11 j081 figs-metaphor ὅτι ἡ σκοτία ἐτύφλωσεν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 because the darkness has blinded his eyes John is using blindness figuratively to mean a loss of moral sense. Alternate translation: “because evil intentions are keeping him from knowing right and wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN 2 12 in8n figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 little children John uses the term **little children** in [2:1](../02/01.md) and in several other places in this letter to refer to all of the believers to whom he is writing. See the explanation of it in two of the notes to [2:1](../02/01.md). UST takes the term to mean that in this case as well. However, it is also possible that in this case the term has a more specialized meaning and that it refers to only some of the believers, since it seems to represent only one of three groups of believers that John addresses twice in [2:12–14](../02/12.md). Moreover, the next time John addresses this first group, in [2:14](../02/14.md), he uses a different word that means “young children.” So in this context, the term could figuratively be describing new believers, that is, those who have just put their faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of their sins. Alternate translation: “new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1JN 2 12 in8n figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 little children John uses the term **little children** in [2:1](../02/01.md) and in several other places in this letter to refer to all of the believers to whom he is writing. See the explanation of it in two of the notes to [2:1](../02/01.md). UST takes the term to mean that in this case as well. However, it is also possible that in this case the term has a more specialized meaning and that it refers to only some of the believers, since it seems to represent only one of three groups of believers that John addresses twice in [2:12-14](../02/12.md). Moreover, the next time John addresses this first group, in [2:14](../02/14.md), he uses a different word that means “young children.” So in this context, the term could figuratively be describing new believers, that is, those who have just put their faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of their sins. Alternate translation: “new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 2 12 ed41 figs-activepassive ἀφέωνται ὑμῖν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 your sins have been forgiven If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has forgiven your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1JN 2 12 j082 writing-pronouns διὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 because of his name The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1JN 2 12 yjy8 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 because of his name John is using the **name** of Jesus figuratively to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “because of what Jesus has done for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1JN 2 13 j085 figs-metonymy τὸν πονηρόν 1 the evil one John is speaking figuratively of the devil by association with the way that he is **evil**. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1JN 2 14 j086 figs-parallelism ἔγραψα ὑμῖν, παιδία, ὅτι ἐγνώκατε τὸν Πατέρα 1 I have written to you, young children, because you know the Father This sentence means basically the same thing as the sentence in [2:12](../02/12.md). The next two sentences in this verse mean basically the same thing as the two sentences in [2:13](../02/13.md). John is using repetition for emphasis and for poetic effect. For those reasons, it would be appropriate to translate all of these sentences separately and not combine them with the ones in the previous two verses, even if you combine parallel statements with similar meanings elsewhere in the book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1JN 2 14 j087 translate-textvariants ἔγραψα ὑμῖν, παιδία, ὅτι ἐγνώκατε τὸν Πατέρα 1 I have written to you, young children, because you know the Father In some Bibles, this sentence comes at the end of [2:13](../02/13.md) instead of at the beginning of this verse. The verse divisions were introduced to the Bible many centuries after its books were written, and their purpose is only to help readers find things easily. So the placement of this sentence, either at the start of this verse or at the end of the previous one, does not create any significant difference in meaning. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the placement in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the placement in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1JN 2 14 j088 figs-verbs ἔγραψα ὑμῖν 1 I have written to you By saying **I have written**, John is expressing himself slightly differently than in [2:12–13](../02/12.md), where he says, “I am writing.” The difference is likely only for emphasis, as John looks back at what he has just said and indicates that he is saying it again. However, if your language distinguishes between the present and present perfect tenses, it would be appropriate to show the difference in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
+1JN 2 14 j088 figs-verbs ἔγραψα ὑμῖν 1 I have written to you By saying **I have written**, John is expressing himself slightly differently than in [2:12-13](../02/12.md), where he says, “I am writing.” The difference is likely only for emphasis, as John looks back at what he has just said and indicates that he is saying it again. However, if your language distinguishes between the present and present perfect tenses, it would be appropriate to show the difference in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
1JN 2 14 j089 figs-metaphor παιδία 1 young children While this is a different term from “little children” in [2:12](../02/12.md), figuratively it means the same thing. Alternate translation: “new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 2 14 j090 ἐγνώκατε 1 you know As in [2:4](../02/04.md), John is using the word **know** in a specific sense. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “you have a close relationship with”
1JN 2 14 j091 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1JN 2 24 ty7q figs-metaphor καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ μενεῖτε 1 you will also remain in the Son and in the Father See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as in [2:6](../02/06.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “you will also continue to have a close relationship with the Son and with the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 2 24 j133 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Υἱῷ…τῷ Πατρὶ 1 the Son…the Father **Son** and **Father** are important titles. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Son of God … God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1JN 2 25 llj2 ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἣν αὐτὸς ἐπηγγείλατο ἡμῖν 1 the promise that he promised to us Here John uses a cognate accusative, that is, an object that comes from the same root as its verb. You may be able to do the same thing in your translation. If not, you could explain what this means. Alternate translation: “the promise that he made to us” or “what he promised us”
-1JN 2 25 j134 writing-pronouns αὐτὸς 1 he The pronoun **he** could refer in this context either to Jesus or to God the Father. However, it seems more likely that it refers to Jesus, since John has just talked in [2:22–23](../02/22.md) about denying or confessing him, and it was Jesus who promised **eternal life** to everyone who believed in him. See, for example, the Gospel of John [3:36](../jhn/03/36.md) and [6:47](../jhn/06/47.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+1JN 2 25 j134 writing-pronouns αὐτὸς 1 he The pronoun **he** could refer in this context either to Jesus or to God the Father. However, it seems more likely that it refers to Jesus, since John has just talked in [2:22-23](../02/22.md) about denying or confessing him, and it was Jesus who promised **eternal life** to everyone who believed in him. See, for example, the Gospel of John [3:36](../jhn/03/36.md) and [6:47](../jhn/06/47.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1JN 2 25 id51 figs-metaphor τὴν ζωὴν τὴν αἰώνιον 1 eternal life John means more than physical **life**. This expression can indicate living forever in the presence of God after death, a commonly recognized meaning, but it can also indicate receiving power from God in this life to live in a new way. Alternate translation: “that we would have power to live a new life now and that we would live with him forever after we die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 2 26 fe44 figs-metaphor τῶν πλανώντων ὑμᾶς 1 those who are leading you astray John speaks figuratively of these people as if they were guides who were **leading** others in the wrong direction. This is a metaphor for their attempts to get the people to whom John is writing to believe things that are not true. Alternate translation: “those who are deceiving you” or “those who are trying to get you to believe things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 2 27 cn2f figs-metaphor τὸ χρῖσμα ὃ ἐλάβετε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 the anointing that you received from him See how you translated the word **anointing** in [2:20](../02/20.md). Alternate translation: “the Spirit, whom Jesus has given you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1JN 2 29 j148 figs-abstractnouns πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην 1 everyone who does righteousness If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an adjective such as “right.” Alternate translation: “everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1JN 2 29 u6er figs-activepassive πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται 1 everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God is the father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1JN 2 29 j149 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται 1 everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him Since believers have not literally **been begotten** by God, John means this figuratively. He says in [4:9](../04/09.md) that Jesus is the “only-begotten” of God, since God is the actual Father of Jesus in a way that he is not the actual father of believers. Alternate translation: “God is the spiritual father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN 3 intro d8r2 0 # 1 John 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Genuine children of God do not sin (3:1–10, continuing from 2:28)
2. Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11–18)
3. Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19–24)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “children of God”
People are sometimes described as “children of God” because God created them. However, John uses this expression in a different sense in this chapter. He uses it to describe people who have entered into a father-child relationship with God by putting their faith and trust in Jesus. God indeed created all people, but people can only become children of God in this sense by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “the one who keeps his commandments remains in him, and he in him” (3:24)
This does not mean that keeping our salvation is conditional on doing certain works. Rather, John is describing the results of keeping the commandments that he describes in [3:32](../03/32.md). Those commandments are to believe in Jesus and to love one another. John is saying that the person who believes in Jesus and loves others shows that he has a close relationship with God, and that he will continue to have that close relationship because of this obedience. Christians around the world hold different beliefs about whether people who have been saved can lose their salvation. That is not what John is addressing here, and translators should be careful not to let how they understand that issue affect how they translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
In [3:1](../03/01.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts include the words “and we are.” That is the reading that ULT follows. However, some other ancient manuscripts do not include these words, and so some Bibles do not have them. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1JN 3 intro d8r2 0 # 1 John 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. Genuine children of God do not sin (3:1-10, continuing from 2:28)
2. Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11-18)
3. Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19-24)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “children of God”
People are sometimes described as “children of God” because God created them. However, John uses this expression in a different sense in this chapter. He uses it to describe people who have entered into a father-child relationship with God by putting their faith and trust in Jesus. God indeed created all people, but people can only become children of God in this sense by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “the one who keeps his commandments remains in him, and he in him” (3:24)
This does not mean that keeping our salvation is conditional on doing certain works. Rather, John is describing the results of keeping the commandments that he describes in [3:32](../03/32.md). Those commandments are to believe in Jesus and to love one another. John is saying that the person who believes in Jesus and loves others shows that he has a close relationship with God, and that he will continue to have that close relationship because of this obedience. Christians around the world hold different beliefs about whether people who have been saved can lose their salvation. That is not what John is addressing here, and translators should be careful not to let how they understand that issue affect how they translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
In [3:1](../03/01.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts include the words “and we are.” That is the reading that ULT follows. However, some other ancient manuscripts do not include these words, and so some Bibles do not have them. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1JN 3 1 gl8n figs-metaphor ἴδετε 1 See John is using the term **See** figuratively. Alternate translation: “Consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 3 1 j150 ποταπὴν ἀγάπην δέδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Πατὴρ 1 what kind of love the Father has given to us Alternate translation: “how greatly the Father has loved us”
1JN 3 1 j151 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1JN 3 14 j190 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφούς 1 the brothers See how you translated this in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 3 14 j191 figs-ellipsis ὁ μὴ ἀγαπῶν 1 The one who does not love John does not say specifically whom such a person **does not love**. In context, it appears that he means other believers. UST expresses that interpretation. But it is also possible that John means other people in general. Alternate translation: “The one who does not love his fellow believers” or “The one who does not love other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1JN 3 14 qa7l figs-metaphor μένει ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1 remains in death See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it means staying in the same place. John is once again speaking figuratively of the state of **death** as if it were a location. Alternate translation: “is still spiritually dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN 3 15 mqu2 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ μισῶν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, ἀνθρωποκτόνος ἐστίν 1 Everyone who hates his brother is a murderer John is using the term **murderer** figuratively, and he is echoing the teaching of Jesus that is recorded in Matthew [5:21–22](../05/21.md). John means that since people commit murder because they hate other people, anyone who hates is the same on the inside as someone who actually kills another person. It may be helpful to translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Whoever hates another believer is just like someone who kills a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1JN 3 15 mqu2 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ μισῶν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, ἀνθρωποκτόνος ἐστίν 1 Everyone who hates his brother is a murderer John is using the term **murderer** figuratively, and he is echoing the teaching of Jesus that is recorded in Matthew [5:21-22](../05/21.md). John means that since people commit murder because they hate other people, anyone who hates is the same on the inside as someone who actually kills another person. It may be helpful to translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Whoever hates another believer is just like someone who kills a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 3 15 j192 figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother See how you translated this in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 3 15 j193 πᾶς ἀνθρωποκτόνος οὐκ ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 every murderer does not have eternal life If it would be clearer in your language, you could make the subject negative and the verb positive. Alternate translation: “no murderer has eternal life”
1JN 3 15 j194 figs-metaphor ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 eternal life Since John is speaking of a present reality, by **eternal life** he does not mean living forever in the presence of God after death, which is one thing that this expression can describe. Rather, he means the regenerating power that God gives to believers in this life that helps them stop sinning and do what pleases him. Clearly, anyone who is a “murderer” does not have this power at work in him. Alternate translation: “the power that God gives to help us become new people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1JN 3 24 j230 figs-metaphor καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and he in him John is speaking figuratively as if God could be inside of believers. Alternate translation: “and God continues to have a close relationship with that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 3 24 j231 figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι 1 in this we know that This is an idiomatic expression that John uses many times in this letter. Alternate translation: “this is how we know that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1JN 3 24 j232 figs-metaphor μένει ἐν ἡμῖν 1 he remains in us See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as it does earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “he continues to have a close relationship with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN 4 intro l3qa 0 # 1 John 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
2. Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Spirit” and “spirit”
John uses the word “spirit” in different ways in this chapter.
Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to a supernatural being.
Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to the character of something. The expressions “the spirit of the antichrist,” “the spirit of truth,” and “the spirit of error” refer to what is typical of them.
When the word is written with a capital letter, as in the expressions “the Spirit of God” and “his Spirit,” it refers to the Holy Spirit.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Loving God
If people love God, they should show it in the way they live and the way they treat other people. Doing this may assure us that God has saved us and that we belong to him. But loving others does not save us. Be sure that this is clear in your translation. John says in 4:7 that “everyone who loves is begotten from God and knows God.” As the notes explain, this means that God is the spiritual father of everyone who loves, and everyone who loves is in a close relationship with God. But that love is a sign that they belong to God because of what Jesus did for them on the cross, as John says in 4:10. They were saved by what Jesus did, not because they themselves loved others. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
In [4:3](../04/03.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some other ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus Christ having come in the flesh.” (Some of these manuscripts say “Jesus” or “the Lord Jesus” instead of “Jesus Christ.”) If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1JN 4 intro l3qa 0 # 1 John 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1-6)
2. Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7-21)
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Spirit” and “spirit”
John uses the word “spirit” in different ways in this chapter.
Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to a supernatural being.
Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to the character of something. The expressions “the spirit of the antichrist,” “the spirit of truth,” and “the spirit of error” refer to what is typical of them.
When the word is written with a capital letter, as in the expressions “the Spirit of God” and “his Spirit,” it refers to the Holy Spirit.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Loving God
If people love God, they should show it in the way they live and the way they treat other people. Doing this may assure us that God has saved us and that we belong to him. But loving others does not save us. Be sure that this is clear in your translation. John says in 4:7 that “everyone who loves is begotten from God and knows God.” As the notes explain, this means that God is the spiritual father of everyone who loves, and everyone who loves is in a close relationship with God. But that love is a sign that they belong to God because of what Jesus did for them on the cross, as John says in 4:10. They were saved by what Jesus did, not because they themselves loved others. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
In [4:3](../04/03.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some other ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus Christ having come in the flesh.” (Some of these manuscripts say “Jesus” or “the Lord Jesus” instead of “Jesus Christ.”) If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1JN 4 1 h1lv figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved See how you translated this in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” or “Dear friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1JN 4 1 zm7f figs-metonymy μὴ παντὶ πνεύματι πιστεύετε, ἀλλὰ δοκιμάζετε τὰ πνεύματα 1 do not believe every spirit, but test the spirits John is speaking figuratively of a prophet by association with the **spirit** that would inspire a prophet to speak. Alternate translation: “do not believe every prophet; instead, consider carefully what prophets say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1JN 4 1 j234 figs-idiom εἰ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 whether they are from God The expression **from God** is an idiom. John uses it in various ways in this letter. Alternate translation: “in order to determine whether God has sent them” or “in order to determine whether God is inspiring them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1JN 4 5 em2t figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος αὐτῶν ἀκούει 1 the world listens to them In this instance, the term **world** figuratively refers to people living in the world, and specifically to people who do not honor or obey God. Alternate translation: “ungodly people listen to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1JN 4 5 j253 figs-idiom ὁ κόσμος αὐτῶν ἀκούει 1 the world listens to them The word **listens** is an idiom that means “believes” or “is persuaded by.” Alternate translation: “ungodly people believe them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1JN 4 6 j254 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἡμῶν…ἡμῶν 1 We … to us … to us These pronouns in the first three sentences of this verse would be exclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, use the inclusive form in your translation. John is speaking of himself and his fellow eyewitnesses of the resurrection as teachers of the truth about Jesus. He is not speaking of himself and the believers to whom he is writing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-1JN 4 6 j328 figs-idiom ἡμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐσμεν 1 We are from God Here, **from God** could mean: (1) It could mean the same thing as it does in [4:4](../04/04.md) and in [4:1–3](../04/01.md). That is the interpretation in UST. Alternate translation: “We belong to God” (2) John could be saying that he and his fellow eyewitnesses teach the truth about Jesus because God has sent them to do that. Alternate translation: “God has sent us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1JN 4 6 j328 figs-idiom ἡμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐσμεν 1 We are from God Here, **from God** could mean: (1) It could mean the same thing as it does in [4:4](../04/04.md) and in [4:1-3](../04/01.md). That is the interpretation in UST. Alternate translation: “We belong to God” (2) John could be saying that he and his fellow eyewitnesses teach the truth about Jesus because God has sent them to do that. Alternate translation: “God has sent us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1JN 4 6 j256 figs-idiom ἡμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐσμεν 1 We are from God If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what God has sent John and the other eyewitnesses to do. Alternate translation: “God has sent us to teach the truth about Jesus as eyewitnesses to his life on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1JN 4 6 j257 ὁ γινώσκων τὸν Θεὸν 1 The one who knows God As in [2:4](../02/04.md), John is using the word **knows** in a specific sense. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “Anyone who has a close relationship with God”
1JN 4 6 j258 figs-idiom ἀκούει ἡμῶν…οὐκ ἀκούει ἡμῶν 1 listens to us … does not listen to us As in [4:5](../04/05.md), the word **listens** is an idiom that means “believes” or “is persuaded by.” Alternate translation: “believes what we teach … does not believe what we teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -436,7 +436,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1JN 4 6 j262 figs-metonymy τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης 1 the spirit of truth and the spirit of error See the discussion of the word **spirit** in the General Notes to this chapter. In these instances, the word refers to the character of something. John is using it figuratively to refer by association to people whose teaching has a certain character. Alternate translation: “whose teaching is true and whose teaching is false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1JN 4 6 j263 figs-abstractnouns τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης 1 the spirit of truth and the spirit of error If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **truth** and **error** with the adjectives “true” and “false.” Alternate translation: “whose teaching is true and whose teaching is false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1JN 4 7 fpl5 figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved See how you translated this in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” or “Dear friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-1JN 4 7 c6w6 figs-idiom ἡ ἀγάπη ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 love is from God The expression **from God** means something similar to what it does in [4:1–3](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “God inspires us to love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+1JN 4 7 c6w6 figs-idiom ἡ ἀγάπη ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 love is from God The expression **from God** means something similar to what it does in [4:1-3](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “God inspires us to love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1JN 4 7 zvt9 figs-activepassive πᾶς ὁ ἀγαπῶν, ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται 1 everyone who loves has been begotten from God See how you translated this in [2:29](../02/29.md). Alternate translation: “God is the father of everyone who loves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1JN 4 7 ec73 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ ἀγαπῶν, ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται 1 everyone who loves has been begotten from God See whether in [2:29](../02/29.md) you decided to explain this metaphor. Alternate translation: “God is the spiritual father of everyone who loves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 4 7 j264 καὶ γινώσκει τὸν Θεόν 1 and knows God As in [2:4](../02/04.md), John is using the word **knows** in a specific sense. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “and such a person has a close relationship with God”
@@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
1JN 4 21 j297 ταύτην τὴν ἐντολὴν ἔχομεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 we have this commandment from him Alternate translation: “this is what God has commanded us”
1JN 4 21 j298 writing-pronouns ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 from him The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1JN 4 21 j299 figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother See how you translated this in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “each fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-1JN 5 intro bxm4 0 # 1 John 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)
2. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)
## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “a sin towards death”
It is not entirely clear what John means by this phrase. The word “death” could refer either to physical death or to spiritual death, that is, to eternal separation from God. See the further discussion in the notes to [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
### “the whole world lies in the power of the evil one”
The phrase “the evil one” refers to Satan. God has allowed him to rule the world, but, ultimately, God is in control over everything. God keeps his children safe from the evil one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
In [5:7–8](../05/07.md), all ancient manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify, the Spirit and the water and the blood, and the three are unto the one.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some much later manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify in heaven: the Father, the Word, and the Holy Spirit, and these three are one; and there are three who testify on earth: the Spirit and the water and the blood, and these three are unto the one.” In this case, translators are advised to translate this as the ULT text does, since there is wide agreement that it follows the accurate reading. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that have the longer reading, you can include it, but you should put it inside square brackets [ ] to indicate that it was most likely not in the original version of 1 John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+1JN 5 intro bxm4 0 # 1 John 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1-12)
2. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)
## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “a sin towards death”
It is not entirely clear what John means by this phrase. The word “death” could refer either to physical death or to spiritual death, that is, to eternal separation from God. See the further discussion in the notes to [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
### “the whole world lies in the power of the evil one”
The phrase “the evil one” refers to Satan. God has allowed him to rule the world, but, ultimately, God is in control over everything. God keeps his children safe from the evil one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]])
## Important textual issues in this chapter
In [5:7-8](../05/07.md), all ancient manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify, the Spirit and the water and the blood, and the three are unto the one.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some much later manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify in heaven: the Father, the Word, and the Holy Spirit, and these three are one; and there are three who testify on earth: the Spirit and the water and the blood, and these three are unto the one.” In this case, translators are advised to translate this as the ULT text does, since there is wide agreement that it follows the accurate reading. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that have the longer reading, you can include it, but you should put it inside square brackets [ ] to indicate that it was most likely not in the original version of 1 John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1JN 5 1 j300 ὁ Χριστὸς 1 the Christ **Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” Alternate translation: “the Messiah”
1JN 5 1 j301 figs-activepassive πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ Χριστὸς, ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται 1 Everyone who believes that Jesus is the Christ has been begotten from God See how you translated the similar expression in [2:29](../02/29.md). Alternate translation: “God is the father of everyone who believes that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1JN 5 1 h8if figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ Χριστὸς, ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται 1 Everyone who believes that Jesus is the Christ has been begotten from God See whether in [2:29](../02/29.md) you decided to explain this metaphor. Alternate translation: “God is the spiritual father of everyone who believes that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
diff --git a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv
index 4a0932ce0..cdbffc3ec 100644
--- a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-2JN front intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 2 John
1. Opening of letter (1:1-3)
2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4-6)
3. Warning about false teachers (1:7–11)
4. Closing of letter (1:12-13)
### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?
The author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.
### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?
The author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). Although this could refer to a specific woman and her children, that interpretation is unlikely. More probably, this is a figurative way to refer to a specific congregation and its members. This interpretation is supported by the way that John refers to the congregation with him as “the children of your chosen sister” in verse 13. This would be a readily understandable metaphor, since the word for “church” in Greek is a feminine noun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### What is the book of 2 John about?
It appears that John addressed this letter to a specific congregation of believers. John’s purpose in writing this letter to them was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers.
He probably intended this message to be passed on to all believers in general.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is hospitality?
Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.
### Who were the people John spoke against?
The people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think that God could become human. Therefore, they believed that Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?
In [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most Bible scholars consider to be authentic and say “our joy.” In this case, “our” would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+2JN front intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of 2 John
1. Opening of letter (1:1-3)
2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4-6)
3. Warning about false teachers (1:7-11)
4. Closing of letter (1:12-13)
### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?
The author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.
### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?
The author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). Although this could refer to a specific woman and her children, that interpretation is unlikely. More probably, this is a figurative way to refer to a specific congregation and its members. This interpretation is supported by the way that John refers to the congregation with him as “the children of your chosen sister” in verse 13. This would be a readily understandable metaphor, since the word for “church” in Greek is a feminine noun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### What is the book of 2 John about?
It appears that John addressed this letter to a specific congregation of believers. John’s purpose in writing this letter to them was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers.
He probably intended this message to be passed on to all believers in general.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is hospitality?
Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.
### Who were the people John spoke against?
The people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think that God could become human. Therefore, they believed that Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?
In [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most Bible scholars consider to be authentic and say “our joy.” In this case, “our” would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2JN 1 1 uspy figs-123person ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2JN 1 1 z4tk figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder **The elder** likely means John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as **elder** either because of his old age, or because he is a leader in the church, or both. If you have a term for an older, respected leader, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing this letter” or Alternate translation: “I, John the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2JN 1 1 y7hw figs-123person ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 to the chosen lady and her children In this culture, letter writers would name the addressees next, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “to you, chosen lady, and to your children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo
2JN 1 6 nw4g figs-metaphor περιπατῶμεν κατὰ…ἐν…περιπατῆτε 1 we should walk according to…you should walk in In these instances the expression **walk** figuratively means to “obey.” Alternate translation: “we should obey … you should obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2JN 1 6 cl95 figs-you ἠκούσατε…περιπατῆτε 1 you heard…you should walk The term **you** is plural in this verse, because John is addressing a congregation of believers. This is the case throughout the rest of the letter, as well, except in verse 13, because there John returns to his metaphor of referring to a church as a woman and its members as her children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2JN 1 7 u749 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 For Here, **For** introduces the reason why John wrote about the commandment to love and obey God in the previous verses—it is because there are many who pretend to be believers but they do not love or obey God. Use a natural way to introduce this reason in your language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-2JN 1 7 w25m figs-explicit ὅτι πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθαν εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 For many deceivers have gone out into the world This seems to be an implicit reference to the false teachers whom John discusses in [verses 10–11](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “For many deceivers are going around from place to place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2JN 1 7 w25m figs-explicit ὅτι πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθαν εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 For many deceivers have gone out into the world This seems to be an implicit reference to the false teachers whom John discusses in [verses 10-11](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “For many deceivers are going around from place to place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2JN 1 7 x8yl figs-metonymy Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἐρχόμενον ἐν σαρκί 1 Jesus Christ coming in flesh The expression **coming in flesh** is a metonym for being a real, physical person and not a spiritual being only. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ came as a real human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2JN 1 7 vqnb figs-explicit οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πλάνος καὶ ὁ ἀντίχριστος 1 This is the deceiver and the antichrist Here, **this** could mean: (1) the activity of deceiving others or to the kind of teaching that these people are doing. Alternate translation: “This is the work of the deceiver, the antichrist” or “This kind of teaching comes from the one who is the deceiver and the antichrist” or (2) any member of the group of deceivers. Alternate translation: “Any such person is the deceiver and the antichrist” If it would be helpful, you can make one of these meanings explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2JN 1 7 vfdn ὁ πλάνος καὶ ὁ ἀντίχριστος 1 the deceiver and the antichrist In your translation, it may be helpful to clarify that **the deceiver** and **the antichrist** are one person, not two.